MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS…€¦ · MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING...

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS) B.E CIVIL ENGINEERING

MEPCO –R2015 CBCS Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabus

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Description Page No.

1. Regulations: Mepco - R2015 1

2. Curriculum 21

3. Syllabus - I Semester 36

4. Syllabus - II Semester 51

5. Syllabus - III Semester 63

6. Syllabus - IV Semester 75

7. Syllabus - V Semester 87

8. Syllabus - VI Semester 95

9. Syllabus - VII Semester 102

10. Syllabus - VIII Semester 147

11. Core Elective – I (V Semester) 107

12. Core Elective – II (VI Semester) 115

13. Core Elective – III (VII Semester) 124

14. Core Elective – IV (VII Semester) 131

15. Core Elective – V (VII Semester) 139

16. Core Elective – VI (VIII Semester) 147

Sl.No. Course Offering Department

Syllabus Page No.

Allied

Elective

Open

Elective

Value

Added

Course

Special

Course

1. Civil Engineering - 249 393 434

2. Electrical and Electronics Engineering 154 276 395 435

3. Electronics and Communication Engineering 167 291 398 440

4. Computer Science Engineering 180 316 404 445

5. Mechanical Engineering 194 331 408 446

6. Information and Technology 223 353 420 452

7. Bio – Technology 236 366 - 459

8. Mathematics - 379 428 -

9. English - 385 - -

10. Physics - 387 - -

11. Chemistry - 390 - -

12. Master of Business Administration - - - -

1

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)

AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

Institute Vision Institute Mission

Envisioning a World

Lead by our Engineers,

Holding a Beacon of Hope and

Confidence for Generations to come

To Produce Competent,

Disciplined, Quality

Engineers & Administrators

Through Service par Excellence

REGULATIONS: MEPCO-R2015

[Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Degree

(8 – Semester / 6 - Semester LES) Full-Time Programmes]

(w.e.f. 2015 – 2016)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

Degree of Bachelor of Engineering / Bachelor of Technology

1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:

I). “Programme” means Degree Programme, that is, B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme.

II). “Discipline” means Branch or specialization of B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme, like Civil

Engineering, Information Technology, etc.

III). “Course” means a theory or a practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, like

Mathematics, Physics, Engineering Graphics, Circuit Theory etc.

IV). “Chairperson, Academic Council” means the authority of the Autonomous Institution who is

responsible for all academic activities of the Institute/Departments for implementation of

relevant Rules and Regulations.

V). “Controller of Examinations” means the authority of the Autonomous Institute who is

responsible for all activities of the End semester Examinations.

VI). “Head of the Institution” means the Principal of the campus.

VII). “Chairperson, BoS” means Chairperson of Board of Studies of each faculty.

VIII). “Head of the Department” means Head of the Department concerned.

IX). “Credit” means a numerical value allocated for each course to describe the student’s workload

required per week.

X). “Grade” means the letter grade assigned to each course based on the range of marks

specified.

XI). “Grade Point” means a numerical value (0 to 10) allocated based on the grade assigned to

each course.

XII). “University” means Anna University, Chennai.

XIII). LES means Lateral Entry Scheme.

2

XIV). CBCS means Choice Based Credit System.

XV). Core Elective (COEL) course means the courses which are applicable only for the concerned

programme students only.

XVI). Open Elective (OPEL) course means the courses which are open to all the UG programme

students.

XVII). Allied Elective (ALEL) a course which can be opted by students of UG programme other than

students of the hosting programme

XVIII). Value Added Course (VAC) means a course that will be offered by the department to bridge

the gap between the curriculum and the requirements of the industry, which could be selected

by any student in the college.

XIX). Special Course (SPC) means a course for the registered students of concerned programme,

to be offered by the expert from reputed industry/institution in India/Abroad.

XX). Audit Course (AUC) means a course which could be audited by the students across any

programme in the college.

2. ADMISSION PROCEDURE

2.1.a) Candidates for admission to the first semester of the eight semesters B.E. / B.Tech.

Degree Programme shall be required to have passed:

The Higher Secondary Examination of (10 + 2) Curriculum (Regular Academic Stream)

prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as

three of the four subjects of the study prescribed under part-III or any other examinations of any

University or authority accepted by the Syndicate of the University / Directorate of Technical

Education as equivalent thereto.

(OR)

Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational Stream

(Vocational groups in Engineering / Technology) as prescribed by the Government of Tamil

Nadu.

2.1.b) Candidates for admission to the second year (LES) of the four year B.E. / B.Tech.

Degree Programme shall be required to have passed:

The Diploma Examination in Engineering conducted by the State Board of Technical

Education and Training, Tamil Nadu.

(OR)

An Examination of any University or Authority, accepted by the Syndicate of the Anna

University as equivalent thereto.

(OR)

Any other examination as notified by the Government of Tamil Nadu.

Candidates who have passed Bachelor of Science conducted by the State Board of

Collegiate Education, are eligible for admission to the Third semester under LES of the B.E. /

B.Tech. Degree Programmes. In addition, any other conditions as notified by the Government

of Tamil Nadu will be followed.

3

2.2. The eligibility criteria such as marks, number of attempts and physical fitness shall be as

prescribed by the Syndicate of the University / DoTE from time to time.

3. PROGRAMMES OFFERED

A candidate may be offered admission to any one of the programmes / disciplines of study

approved by the Academic council of Institution.

Programmes / disciplines offered by the Institute are listed in Annexure.

4. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMMES

4.1 Every Programme will have a curriculum with syllabi consisting of theory and practical

courses such as:

1. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS), including Management

2. Basic Sciences (BS) including Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Biology

3. Engineering Sciences (ES), including Materials, Workshop, Drawing, Basics of

Electrical / Electronics / Mechanical / Chemical / Computer Engineering,

Instrumentation, Bio-Technology

4. Core Courses (CC) - Relevant to the chosen specialization/branch

5. Core Electives (COEL) – Six numbers of Core Electives relevant to the chosen

specialization/ branch are to be selected and will be offered from V semester onwards.

6. Open Electives (OPEL) – Four numbers of Open Elective courses from the list

prescribed in the curriculum which will be offered from V semester onwards, with one

course in each semester. The students have to register for this course.

7. Allied Electives (ALEL) - Two numbers of Allied Elective courses from the list

prescribed in the curriculum which will be offered in V and VI semester. The students

have to register for this course.

8. Project Work, Seminar and/or Internship in reputed organization/Industry.

4.2. Procedure for the enrollment for the OPEL / ALEL:

The students have to register for the Open and Allied Elective courses through appropriate

course registration form. Prior permission of the Course Instructor and the Heads of the

Respective Department is required.

4.3. New courses may be introduced by the department / institution at any time depending upon the

requirement after getting approval from the concerned Board of Studies, Academic Council and

Governing Body.

4.4 Each course is normally assigned a certain number of credits with

1 credit per lecture period per week and 1 credit per 2 tutorial periods per week for

theory courses.

1 credit for 2 periods of laboratory or practical courses.

1 credit for 2 periods of technical seminar or 2 periods of mini project work per week.

1 Credit for acquiring the international certification in a relevant discipline for showing

their competency in the international level (For example: Oracle Java Certification as

approved by the concerned HOD) subject to a maximum of 2 credits during their

programme.

4

4.5 Each semester curriculum shall normally have a blend of theory courses not exceeding 6 and

practical courses not exceeding 4, subject to a maximum of 9 courses.

4.6 For the award of the degree, a student has to earn the total number of credits specified in

the curriculum of the relevant discipline / branch of study (Annexure-I).

4.7 The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar presentations

and project report.

5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

5.1 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. / B.Tech. P rogramme in 8

semesters (four academic years ) but in any case not more than 7 years (14

semesters). In case of LES, a student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. /

B.Tech. P rogramme in 6 semesters (three academic years) but in any case not more

than 6 years (12 semesters).

5.2 Each semester shall normally consist of 90 working days or 450 periods of 50 minutes

each. The Head of the Department shall ensure that every teacher imparts instruction as

per the number of periods specified in the syllabus and that the teacher teaches the entire

content of the specified syllabus for the course being taught.

5.3 However, special theory/practical classes may be conducted for students who require

additional coaching over and above the number of periods normally specified, as decided

by the class committee.

But for the purpose of calculation of attendance requirements for writing the End Semester

Examinations (as per clause 6) by the students, only 450 periods per semester conducted

within the specified academic schedule shall be taken into account.

5.4 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the

commencement of the first semester (third semester in case of LES) to which the

candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified in clause 5.1

irrespective of the period of break of study (vide clause 18.1) or period of prevention in

order that he/she may be eligible for the award of the degree (vide clause 16).

6. REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER

6.1 A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have satisfied the

requirements for completion of a semester.

Ideally every student is expected to attend all classes and earn 100% attendance. However, in

order to allow provision for certain unavoidable reasons such as medical / personal grounds /

participation in sports, the student is expected to earn a minimum of 75% attendance.

Therefore, he/she shall secure not less than 75% of overall attendance in that semester taking

into account the total number of periods in all courses attended by the candidate as against the

total number of periods in all courses offered during that particular semester.

6.2 However, a candidate who could secure attendance between 65% and less than 75% in the

current semester due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific illness) or due to

participation in the University / State / National / International level Sports events with prior

permission from the Head of the Department concerned shall be given exemption from the

prescribed attendance requirement and he/she shall be permitted to appear for that particular

semester examinations.

6.3 Candidates who secure less than 65% overall attendance will not be permitted to write the End-

Semester Examinations and are not permitted to go to next / subsequent semester. They are

required to repeat the incomplete semester in the next academic year.

5

7. FACULTY ADVISOR

To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the

academic programme, the Head of the Department of the student will attach a certain number of

students to a faculty member of the Department who shall function as Faculty Advisor for those

students throughout their period of study. Such Faculty Advisor shall advise the students and

monitor the courses taken by the students, check the attendance and progress of the students

attached to him / her and counsel them periodically. If necessary, the Faculty Advisor may also

discuss with or inform the parents about the progress / performance of the students concerned.

The responsibilities for the Faculty Advisor shall be:

To act as the channels of communication across the HoD, the students of the

respective class and Parents.

To collect and maintain various statistical details of academic and other activities of

the students

To help the chairperson of the class committee in planning and conduct of the class

committee meetings.

To monitor the academic performance of the students including attendance and to

inform the class committee.

To attend to the students’ welfare activities like awards, medals, scholarships and

industrial visits.

To attend to the students’ grievance and redressal requirements and help them.

8. CLASS COMMITTEE

A class committee consists of teachers of the class concerned, student representatives and a

chairperson, who does not handle any subject for the class. It is like the ‘Quality Circle’ (more

commonly used in industries), with the overall goal of improving the teaching-learning process. The

functions of the class committee include:

• Solving the problems experienced by students in the classroom and in the

laboratories in consultation with Head of the Department / Dean.

• Clarifying the Regulations of the degree programme and the details of rules therein.

• Informing the student representatives, the academic schedule including the mode and

dates of assessments and the syllabus coverage for each assessment.

• Informing the student representatives, the details of Regulations regarding weightage

used for each assessment.

• Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each periodic test and finding

ways and means of improving the performance of the students.

• Identifying the slow learners and helping them to come up by guidance and/or by

providing additional coaching.

The class committee is normally constituted by the Head of the Department. However, if the students

of different branches are mixed in each class the class committee is to be constituted by the

concerned HODs. The class committee shall be constituted within a week from the date of

commencement of a semester. At least 4 student-representatives from the respective class (typically 2

boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the class committee. The Chairperson of the class committee

may invite the Faculty Advisor(s) and the Head of the Department to the meeting of the class

committee. The chairperson of the class committee is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting,

submit the same to the Head of the Department and then to the Principal within three working days of

the meeting and arrange to circulate the same among concerned students and teachers.

6

The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within fifteen days from the date of

commencement of the semester. The nature and weightage of internal assessments shall be informed

in the first meeting, and the same shall be communicated to the students. Two or three subsequent

meetings in a semester may be held at suitable intervals. During these meetings the student members

representing the entire class, shall meaningfully interact and express their opinions and suggestions of

the class students to improve the effectiveness of the teaching-learning process.

9. COURSE COMMITTEE FOR COMMON COURSES

Each common theory course offered to more than one discipline or more than one class handled by different

faculty members, shall have a “Common Course Committee” comprising all the teachers teaching the course

with one of them nominated as Course Coordinator. The nomination of the Course Coordinator shall be

made by the Faculty Chairman in consultation with Heads of Departments of the participating discipline.

The “Common Course Committee” shall meet as often as possible and ensure uniform delivery and

evaluation of internal assessments after arriving at a common scheme of evaluation (subject to clause 10).

Wherever feasible, the common course committee shall prepare a common question paper for the test(s).

10. PROCEDURES FOR AWARDING MARKS FOR INTERNAL ASSESSMENT (IA)

For all B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes, out of 100 marks for each paper the maximum marks for Internal

Assessment is fixed as 40 for Theory Courses / Theory Courses with lab components and End Semester

Examinations carries 60 marks.

However, internal assessment is for 50 marks for Practical Courses and End Semester Examination carries 50

marks and internal assessment is 100 marks for the Project Work while project report evaluation and viva-

voce examination carry 100 marks.

10.1 Internal Assessment for Theory Courses

The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 40 in case of theory courses. Three assessments,

carrying 50 marks each shall be conducted by the co l lege . The total marks obtained in all the three

assessments should be converted to 75 marks and rounded to the nearest integer.

The internal assessment is based on the internal test marks, assignment marks and percentage of

attendance. The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks of 40 are as follows:

(a) Internal tests (75% credence)

Three internal tests, each carrying 50 marks shall be conducted by the Department /

Institution. The total marks obtained in all the tests put together out of 150, shall be reduced to 75

marks and rounded to the nearest integer. This implies equal weight to all the three tests.

However, a makeup test at the discretion of the concerned course faculty / Head of the

Department may be conducted for deserving candidates at the end of the semester, where the

students have to register/request for the makeup test.

(b) Assignment (15% credence)

Two assignments requiring work of average 3 to 4 hours of study and written work of average 3 to

4 hours, each carried out by a student in a separate assignment folder, duly indexed with

headings, date of submission, marks, remarks and signature of faculty with date etc. However,

depending on the nature of the course, the course coordinator may decide a variant of the

assessment such as Quiz/ Case Study Presentation/ Seminar etc. equivalent to assignment

weightage.

7

(c) Attendance (10% credence)

A maximum of 10 marks for attendance out of 100 marks shall be given to each student

depending on his/her attendance percentage as per the distribution given below:

Attendance (10 Marks)

Percentage of attendance Marks out of 10

75-79 2

80-84 4

85-89 6

90-94 8

95 and above 10

10.2 Internal Assessment For Practical Courses

The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 50 in case of practical courses. Every practical

exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on conduct of experiment / exercise and records

maintained. There shall be at least one test. The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks

of 50 are as follows:

Experiment / Observation / Record / Practical Classes performance : 50% credence

Practical Test : 40% credence

Attendance : 10% credence

10.3 Internal Assessment for Theory Courses with Laboratory Component

The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 40 in case of theory courses with laboratory

component. The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment marks of 40 are as follows:

a) Internal Tests (60% credence)

If there is a theory course with laboratory component, there shall be three tests (each 50 marks).

The total 150 marks should be converted to 60 marks. However, a special test at the discretion of

the Head of the Department may be conducted for deserving candidates for which the students

have to request/register with the course instructor

(b) Assignment (15% credence)

Two assignments requiring work of average 3 to 4 hours of study and written work of average 3 to

4 hours, each carried out by a student in a separate assignment folder, duly indexed with

headings, date of submission, marks, remarks and signature of faculty with date etc. However,

depending on the nature of the course, the course coordinator may decide a variant of the

assessment such as Quiz/ Case Study Presentation/ Seminar etc. equivalent to assignment

weightage.

c) Lab experiments / Lab test (15% credence)

A maximum mark of 15 shall be given to practical component. There shall be at least one test

and every practical exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on the conduct of experiment

/ exercise, records maintained.

8

(d) Attendance (10% credence)

A maximum of 10 marks for attendance out of 100 marks shall be given to each student

depending on his/her attendance percentage as per the distribution given below:

Attendance (10 Marks)


75-79 2

80-84 4

85-89 6

90-94 8

95 and above 10

10.4 Internal Assessment for Project Work

There shall be three assessments (each 100 marks) during the semester by a review committee. The

students of the project group (of not exceeding 3 students) shall make presentation on the progress made

before the committee. The Head of the Department shall constitute the review committee for each branch of

study. There shall be a minimum of three members in the review committee. The guide will be an additional

member of the Review Committee and he / she should be present during the presentation of his/her group.

The criteria for arriving at the Internal Assessment mark out of 100 are as follows:

Work assessed by the Project Guide : 30 Marks

Work assessed by the review committee : 60 Marks

Attendance : 10 Marks


75-79 2

80-84 4

85-89 6

90-94 8

95 and above 10

10.4.1 The candidate is expected to submit the project report on or before the last working day of the

semester.

10.4.2 All the project batches of VIII semester students are expected to present their project outcomes in one

International / National Conference.

10.4.3 The details of marks allotment for Internal Assessment and End Semester Examination is given

below.

Internal Assessment End Semester Examinations

Attendance Guide Review I Review

II

Review

III

Report Evaluation Viva-Voce

Internal External Internal External *Guide

10 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

* Due to unavoidable reasons, in the absence of guide during the end semester examination, the internal examiner will

award the mark for the concerned student(s).

9

10.5 Attendance and Assessment Record

Every faculty member is required to maintain an ‘Attendance And Assessment Record’ for

every semester which consists of attendance marked in each lecture or practical or project work

class, the test marks, assignment marks, attendance marks and the record of class work (topics

covered), separately for each course handled by the teacher. This should be submitted to the Head of

the Department periodically (at least three times in a semester) for checking the syllabus coverage

and the records of test marks, assignment marks and attendance. The Head of the Department will

affix his / her signature and date after due verification. At the end of the semester, the record should be

verified by the Head of the Department / Institution who will keep this document in safe custody (for

five years).

11. EXAMINATIONS

Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) Continuous internal assessment

throughout the semester and (ii) End semester examination.

Each course, both theory and practical shall be evaluated for a maximum of 100 marks. The

project work shall be evaluated for a maximum of 200 marks.

Project work may be allotted to a group of students not exceeding 3 per group.

The end semester examination (practical and theory) of 3 hours duration shall be conducted

between October - December during the odd semesters and between April - June during the even

semesters.

The end semester examination for project work shall consist of evaluation of the final report

submitted by the students of the project group (of not exceeding 3 students) by Internal and

External examiners followed by a viva-voce examination conducted separately for each project

group by a committee consisting of the external examiner, internal examiner and the guide of the

project group.

The award of end semester marks for 100 shall be evaluated by both Internal and External

Examiners, out of which the project report shall carry a maximum of 40 marks (same marks must

be awarded to every student of the project group) while the viva-voce examination shall carry 60

marks (awarded to each student of the project group based on the individual performance in the

viva-voce examination.)

i) Theory Courses

Internal Assessment : 40 Marks

End-Semester Exams : 60 Marks

ii) Theory Courses with laboratory component



iii) Practical courses



iv) Project Work

Internal Assessment : 100 marks

End semester

(Project work report Evaluation

and viva-voce examination) : 100 marks

10

12. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for End semester examination of the current semester

if he / she has satisfied the semester completion requirements (vide Clause 6) and has registered for

examination in all courses of that semester by paying the prescribed fee.

However, for students having arrear courses of the previous semester(s), in order to write the current end

semester examination, the registration is mandatory for the examination of all the courses of that

semester and all arrear courses of the previous semester(s) by paying the prescribed fee, failing which,

the candidates will not be permitted to move to the higher semester.

A candidate who has already appeared for any course in a semester and passed the examination is not

entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of letter grades / marks.

12. A. SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION AT THE END OF VIII SEMESTER

(Addition of a Clause 12.A in MEPCO R2015 CBCS (UG Programmes Regulations) as per the

approval of 4th

Academic Council meeting held on 22-04-2016)

At the end of the VIII semester regular examinations, a candidate who has one or two arrears,

only in the VII and VIII semesters, will be eligible for attending the special supplementary examination

immediately after the publication of the results of challenge valuation. Students who have more than two

arrears in VII and VIII semesters and arrears from I semester to VI semester are not eligible to appear

for the special supplementary examination. Controller of Examination shall publish a schedule of special

supplementary examination after the last date of registering for the examination. The pattern of

evaluation will be the same as that of the end semester examination. Such appearance in special

supplementary examination will be treated as another attempt and it will be reflected in the grade sheet.

13. PASSING REQUIREMENTS

13.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for the courses

(Internal Assessment + End semester examination) with a minimum of 45% of the marks

prescribed for the end-semester Examination in theory, theory with practical components and

practical courses (including Project work), shall be declared to have passed in the

Examination.

For any programme, during any semester that conducts a practical course in two parts, say A

and B, it is mandatory that the student must appear for both the parts of the lab in the end

semester practical examination. The candidate is declared as pass in both the parts, A and B

of the lab, only if he / she secure a minimum of 50% put together. If the candidate is absent for

any one part of the lab, the candidate is declared as fail in both the parts A and B of the lab

and he / she should appear in both, part A and B in the subsequent semesters.

13.1.1 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a particular course, it is mandatory that he / she

shall register and reappear for the examination in that course during the next

semester when examination is conducted in that course. It is mandatory that he /

she should continue to register and reappear for the examination till he / she

secures a pass mark.

13.1.2. The internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate in the first appearance

shall be retained and considered valid for all subsequent attempts till the

candidate secures a pass as per clause 13.1. However, from the 3rd attempt

onwards if a candidate fails to obtain pass marks (Internal Assessment + End

11

Semester Examination) as per clause 13.1 then the passing requirement shall be

as per clause 13.2.

13.2 For arrear students, from their 3rd attempt onwards, they should secure a minimum of 50% marks

prescribed for the course in the END Semester Examination alone.

13.3 Evaluation of Answer Scripts

The system of evaluation of answer scripts for theory courses is “Double Valuation” i.e.,

valuation by two examiners independently. Since the answer scripts are subject to double

valuation, there is no provision for revaluation. Even after a double valuation, candidates are

given the right to challenge the valuation. Challenging the valuation is permitted for those

students who have applied for photocopy of answer script. A candidate can apply for

challenge valuation in a theory course, within 2 weeks from the declaration of results, on

payment of a prescribed fee along with prescribed application to the Controller of

Examinations (COE) through the Heads of Departments.

Copies of answer scripts for theory courses can be obtained from the Office of the Controller

of Examinations on payment of a prescribed fee specified for this purpose through proper

application. The copy of answer script is to be valued by a competent authority and the valued

script should be submitted to Controller of Examination’s (COE’s) office along with the

prescribed fee for challenging the valuation. The COE will arrange for the challenge valuation

and the publications of the results.

Challenging is not permitted for Practical Courses, Mini projects, Seminar and for Project

work.

14. AWARD OF LETTER GRADES

All assessments of a course will be done on absolute marks basis. However, for the purpose of

reporting the performance of a candidate, the letter grades, each carrying certain points, will be awarded

as detailed below:

Range of Marks Letter Grade Grade Points (GP)

91 to 100 O (Outstanding) 10

81 to 90 A+ (Excellent) 9

71 to 80 A (Very good) 8

61 to 70 B+ (Good) 7

50 to 60 B (Average) 6

0 to 49 RA (Register for Reappearance)

0

Shortage of Attendance

SA -

Withdrawal W -

Audit Course AU -

‘RA’ denotes Reappearance is required for the examination in that particular course (This

grade will figure both in Grade Sheet as well as in Result Sheet.)

‘SA’ denotes shortage of attendance (as per Clause 6) and hence prevented from writing end

semester examination. ‘SA’ will appear only in the result sheet.

‘W’ denotes withdrawal from the particular course.

‘AU’ denotes Audit Course.

12

15 SGPA AND CGPA CALCULATION

After the results are declared, Grade Sheets will be issued to each student which will contain the

following details:

The list of courses enrolled during the semester and the grades scored.

The Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) and

The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all courses enrolled from first semester (third

semester in case of LES) onwards.

During each semester, the list of courses enrolled and the grades scored in each course are used to

compute the Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA). SGPA is the ratio of the sum of the products of

the number of credits of courses registered and the grade points corresponding to the grades scored in

those courses, taken for all the courses, to the sum of the number of credits of all the courses in the

semester.

n

i

i

n

i

ii

C

GPC

SGPA

1

1

where,

C – Credits assigned to each course

GP – grade point corresponding to the letter grade obtained for each course.

n – number of Courses successfully cleared during the particular semester in the case of SGPA

and during all the semesters in the case of CGPA.

CGPA will be calculated in a similar manner, considering all the courses enrolled from first semester

(third semester in case of LES). “RA”, “SA”, “W” and “AU” grades will be excluded for calculating

SGPA and CGPA.

16. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

16.1. A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the B.E. / B.Tech. Degree

provided,

i). The student has successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the

curriculum corresponding to his/her programme within the stipulated time.

ii). The student has successfully completed the programme requirements and has passed all

the courses prescribed in all the 8 semesters (six semesters in case of LES) within a maximum

period of 7 years (six years in case of LES) reckoned from the commencement of the first

semester (third semester in case of LES) to which the candidate was admitted.

iii). The student has successfully completed any additional courses prescribed by the

Chairperson, Academic Council whenever, any candidate is readmitted under regulations

other than MEPCO R-2015 (vide clause 18.2)

iv). The student has no disciplinary action pending against him/her.

v). The award of Degree shall be approved by the Syndicate of the University.

13

16.2 Classification of the Degree Awarded

16.2.1 First Class with Distinction:

A candidate who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed

the examination in First class with Distinction:

Should have passed the End semester examinations in all the courses of all the

eight semesters (six semesters in case of LES) in his/her First Appearance within four

years (three years in case of LES).

Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.5

Should NOT have been prevented from writing end semester examination due to lack

of attendance in any of the semesters.

Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause 17) will not be construed as an

appearance.

One year authorized break of study (if availed of) is permitted in addition to four

years (three years in case of LES) for award of First class with Distinction.

16.2.2 First Class:

A candidate who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the

examination in First class:

Should have passed the End semester examination in all the courses of all the eight

semesters (six semesters in case of LES) within five years (four years in case of LES).

Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 7.0

Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause17) will not be construed as an appearance.

One year authorized break of study (if availed of) or prevention from writing End

semester examination due to lack of attendance is permitted in addition to five years

(four years in case of LES) for the award of First Class.

16.2.3 Second Class:

All other candidates (not covered in clauses 16.2.1 and 16.2.2) who qualify for the award of

the degree (vide Clause 16.1) shall be declared to have passed the examination in

Second Class.

16.2.4. A candidate who is absent in semester examination in a course / project work after

having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared in that

examination for the purpose of classification.

16.3 Ranks Awarded to Students

Ranks are awarded for each programme based on the following criteria.

The number of ranks awarded for each programme is 6 or 10% of the students’ intake

in that programme, whichever is higher.

The rank of a student is determined from CGPA. However, students who have scored

less than 7.5 CGPA will not be eligible for a rank.

Students should have passed the End semester examination in all the courses

of all the eight semesters (six semesters in case of LES) in his/her First Appearance

without any break of study.

However, for other students, a statement indicating their position in the programme

will be given on request, based on the CGPA, provided they have passed all the

courses within four years (three years in case of LES) of their study.

14

17. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATION

17.1 A candidate may, for valid reasons, (medically unfit / unexpected family situations)

be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for the examination in any course or

courses in any one of the semester examination during the entire duration of the degree

programme.

17.2 Such withdrawal shall be permitted only once during the entire period of study of the degree

programme.

17.3 Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write the

examination (Clause 6) and if it is made within TEN days before the commencement

of the examination in that course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the

Department and approved by the Head of the Institution with intimation to COE.

17.3.1 Not withstanding the requirement of mandatory TEN days notice, applications for

withdrawal for special cases under extraordinary conditions will be considered on the

merit of the case.

17.4 Withdrawal shall not be construed as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a candidate for

First Class with Distinction and First Class.

17.5 Withdrawal is NOT permitted for arrears examinations of the previous semesters.

17.6 Candidates shall appear, for the courses withdrawn, during the examination conducted in the

subsequent semester.

18. AUTHORIZED BREAK OF STUDY FROM A PROGRAMME

18.1 A candidate is normally not permitted to temporarily break the period of study. However, if a

candidate happens to discontinue the programme temporarily in the middle of duration of study

for valid reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health) and to rejoin

the programme in a later semester he / she shall apply to the Chairperson, Academic

Council in advance, in any case, not later than the last date for registering for the semester

in question, through the Head of the Department stating the reasons.

18.2 The candidate permitted to rejoin the programme after the break shall be governed by the

Curricula and regulations in force at the time of rejoining.

18.3 The authorized break of study will not be counted towards the duration specified for passing

all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide Clause 16.2.1 and 16.2.2).

18.4 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from, the

commencement of the first semester (third semester in case of LES) to which the candidate

was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the

period of break of study in order that he / she may be eligible for the award of the degree (vide

clause 16).

18.5 If any student is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and good conduct, the

period spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted ‘Break of Study’ and

Clause 18.3 is not applicable for this case.

18.6 In case of any valid reasons for extension of Break of Study, it may be granted by the approval

of the Chairperson, Academic Council for a period not more than 1 year in addition to the

earlier authorized Break of Study. Such extended break of study shall be counted for the

purpose of classification of degree (vide clause 16.2).

18.7 If the candidate has not reported back to the department, even after the extended

Break of Study, the name of the candidate shall be deleted permanently from the college

enrollment. Such candidates are not entitled to seek readmission under any circumstances.

15

19. INDUSTRIAL VISIT / INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Every student is expected to undergo Industrial visits for every year starting from the second year of the

Programme. Heads of Departments shall take efforts to arrange at least one industrial visit in a year.

The students may undergo industrial training for a total period of 2 – 4 weeks during summer /

winter vacation.

20. PERSONALITY AND CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT

All students shall enroll, on admission, in any one of the personality and character development

programmes (the NCC / NSS / NSO / YRC) and undergo training for about 80 hours inclusive of

attending camps of about seven days. The training shall include classes on hygiene and health

awareness and also training in first-aid.

National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have about 20 parades.

National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in and around the College /

Institution.

National Sports Organization (NSO) will have sports, Games, Drills and Physical exercises.

Youth Red Cross (YRC) will have activities related to social services in and around college/institutions.

While the training activities will normally be during weekends, the camp will normally be during vacation

period.

Every student shall put in a minimum of 75% attendance in the training and attend the camp compulsorily.

The training and camp shall be completed during the first year (second year in case of LES) of the

programme. However, for valid reasons, the Head of the Institution may permit a student to complete

this requirement in the second year (third year in case of LES) also.

21. DISCIPLINE

Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behavior both inside and outside the

Institution and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring down the prestige of the Institution.

In the event of an act of indiscipline being reported, the Principal shall constitute a disciplinary

committee to enquire into the act of indiscipline.

If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the End semester examination / internal examination he /

she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the Institution from time to time.

Ragging is not at all allowed. Punitive actions will be taken against the students involved in ragging as

per the government norms.

22. AUDIT COURSE

UG students can audit courses from UG / PG curriculum based on their areas of interest and is

permitted under the following conditions:

Students with CGPA 7.5 and above will be permitted to ‘Audit' the course. However, this would be

restricted to a maximum of 2 courses during the entire period of the programme.

The students have to register for the courses to be audited through Course Registration Form while

registering for the semester. The course will not carry any credits. The word “Audit” would be

specially mentioned in the remarks column of the student's course registration form. Prior

16

permission of the Course Instructor and the Heads of the Respective Department is

required.

The students would be required to have minimum 75% attendance in the Audit course.

The ‘AU' grade would be awarded, if the attendance is satisfactory and requirements set out by the

course instructor are met. Students will be expected to complete the in-semester assessments. If

the attendance and performance is not satisfactory the course will not appear at all in the Grade

Sheet.

Students can audit a course provided the course is offered and the time table slot permits.

The course done by auditing will not be considered for the purposes of calculation of SGPA / CGPA

but will be reflected in the Semester Grade Sheet as Audit Course.

23. VALUE ADDED COURSES

In order to prepare the students to meet the challenges of the global work environment, value added

courses are offered to bridge the gap between the curriculum and the requirements of the industry.

Value added courses are designed and offered by each department for the benefit of the students. All

the UG students have to undergo at least one value added course in the sixth semester of their study.

UG students can choose any one of the value added course offered by the various departments, based

on their areas of interest at the end of the fifth semester. The students have to register for the value

added course through the Value Added Course Registration Form through their concerned HoD to the

HoD of the department offering the course, before the commencement of the sixth semester. Each

Value Added Course is assigned 2 Credits. The credits earned through value added courses will not be

considered for CGPA calculation. The performance of the students in the value added courses is

evaluated through end semester internal examination for 100 marks. If a student gets a pass mark in the

value added course, then the credits earned will be mentioned in the grade sheet or else, the status,

Audit / Withdrawn may appear in the grade sheet based on the individual student’s attendance.

24. SPECIAL COURSES

Interested Students can opt for special courses of 15 and 30 hours duration, approved by the academic

council. Special courses will be conducted in the semester holidays by experts from industry/research

organizations/higher learning institutions. Each 15 Hour special course is assigned one credit while each

30 Hour Special Course is assigned 2 credits. The credits earned through special courses will not be

considered for CGPA calculation. Students can complete such special courses during the semesters 4

to 7 as and when these courses are conducted by different departments. A student is also permitted to

register for special courses of other departments, provided the student has fulfilled the necessary pre-

requisites of the course being offered and subject to the approval of both the heads of departments. A

student can register for a maximum of 3 special courses. The special courses will be evaluated by the

respective course coordinator within 10 days of the completion of the programme. If a student gets a

pass mark in the special course, then the credits earned will be mentioned in the grade sheet or else,

the status, Audit / Withdrawn may appear in the grade sheet based on the individual student’s

attendance.

17

25. PRO - INTERNSHIP SCHEME

Pro-Internship scheme is designed specifically for students with good academic credentials. It presents

a unique opportunity for the students to complete the theory courses of the program in seven semesters.

Pro - Internship allows students to take up the VIII semester theory courses in VI and VII semesters

itself. Students can go for internship during the VIII semester and complete the VIII semester Project

Work in well reputed Industries / organizations offering Placement to the students / R & D organizations

/ Premier Institutions both in India and Abroad, as part of their internship. This is possible only if the

Industries / organizations offering Placement to the students / R & D organizations / Premier Institutions

allows Internship program with Project and the internship coordinators of the Department concerned are

notified well in advance.

25.1 Internship Benefits to Students:

During the Internship Students can apply the theory they have studied to practical problems in

an engineering / technology environment. They will have the opportunity to screen career

choices. It provides experience often required for future, full-time job searches. Experience

through internship facilitates sound judgment, confidence, teamwork, self-discipline, and

communication skills among the students. They have the possibility to establish contact with

practicing professionals and to get full-time job offers at graduation. It provides an opportunity

to earn while learning.

25.2 Eligibility

The guidelines presented below will be used to select the students for Pro-Internship

1. Students who are in the VI semester with a minimum CGPA of 7.5 upto V semester

2. Those who have completed all the courses upto V semester.

3. However only students who complete all the courses upto VII semester will be allowed

to proceed with the Internship cum Project.

25.3 Application to the Pro - Internship Scheme:

Students eligible for Pro-Internship scheme should apply for the scheme to their HoD within 7

days from the date of publication of V semester results in the VI semester of their study.

25.4 Guidelines to be followed:

(1) Pro Internship students should take at least one VIII semester theory course in VI semester.

The rest of the VIII semester theory courses can be completed in VII semester.

(2) The Pro Internship option requires students to attend two evening classes of 4 periods duration

per week for the VIII semester courses during their VI and VII semesters of their study. If

required, students need to attend additional classes during holidays to meet the curriculum

requirement.

(3) Students will be permitted to start the internship only after the seventh semester end terminal

examinations

(4) Students doing the internship should attend the Project Reviews in the scheduled dates. After

completion of the internship cum project, the final summative evaluation will be conducted with

a view to assign the final score.

18

25.5 Terms and conditions for internship:

1. The internship should be carried out at a single organization.

2. It should be completed within one semester.

3. All arrangements should be specified in the internship agreement.

4. During long leave period and closure of Industries/R&D organization/Premier Institutions for any

reason, during the internship period, the students concerned should continue the work only in the

college.

5. Students should adhere to the rules and regulations of the college and Industries/R&D

organization/Premier Institutions during the Internship cum Project period.

25.6 Termination of the Internship

(i) In the event of prolonged absence of student during the internship or

(ii) If the student has to discontinue the internship due to unforeseen circumstances

during that period or

(iii) If the performance of the work done by the student in the Industries/R&D

organization/Premier Institutions is not satisfactory during the Project Review or

(iv) If the student violates the college rules and regulations during the Internship cum

Project period,

Then the Internship cum Project will be terminated for these students, after due intimation to

the company. In such a situation, the VIII Semester Project will be in jeopardy, i.e. these students

have to repeat their VIII Semester project in the next academic year.

19

ANNEXURE

A candidate may be offered one of the following programmes of study approved by the University. A

candidate of a programme should earn the credits specified against it to enable him to be eligible to

be awarded the degree.

Name of the Programme

Credits

Regular LES

1. FACULTY OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

i) B. E. Civil Engineering 188 137

2. FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

i) B. E. Electrical and Electronics Engineering 190 139

3. FACULTY OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

i) B. E. Electronics and Communication Engineering 190 137

4. FACULTY OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

i) B. E. Computer Science and Engineering 181 130

5. FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

i) B. E. Mechanical Engineering 188 137

6. FACULTY OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

i) B. Tech. Information Technology 182 131

7. FACULTY OF BIOTECHNOLOGY

i) B.Tech. Biotechnology 182 132

26. REVISION OF REGULATIONS AND CURRICULUM

The Institution may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations, scheme of examinations

and syllabi if found necessary.

20

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)

AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025

REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)

(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)

B. E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

Department Vision Department Mission

To serve the Nation by providing a quality

engineering education that enables students’ to

enter a profession that can improve the civil

infrastructure and economic welfare

To provide students with a broad and thorough education in

civil engineering fundamentals, applications, and design that

prepares them for the practice of civil engineering at the

professional level with the confidence and skills necessary to

meet the technical and social challenges of the future.

Programme educational objectives (PEOs):

Technical knowledge : Possess a mastery of fundamental knowledge, problem solving skills,

engineering experimental abilities and design capabilities for advancing in their carrier

Professionalism: Practice the civil engineering profession and follow professional and ethical standards

in executing civil engineering and multi-disciplinary projects on a global level.

Self-Learning: Cope up with advanced technological social, economic, environmental changes through

life-long learning with effective team work, communication skill and leadership qualities.

Programme Outcomes (POs):

1. an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering to solve civil engineering

problems and design the civil engineering projects

2. an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data related to civil

engineering

3. an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints

such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and

sustainability

4. an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams in construction related activities

5. an ability to identify, formulate, and solve civil engineering problems

6. an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility while discharging civil engineering related

works

7. an ability to communicate and present the civil engineering concepts effectively

8. acquire broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global,

economic, environmental, and societal context

9. a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning to update the knowledge in civil

engineering field

10. a knowledge of contemporary issues related to civil engineering practice

11. an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for civil engineering

practice and project management.

21

CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)

SEMESTER- I (Common to all UG Programmes)

SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. 15HS101 Technical English – I 3 0 2 4

2. 15BS101 Mathematics – I 3 2 0 4

3. 15BS102 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3

4. 15BS103 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3

5. 15GE101 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3

6. 15GE102 Engineering Graphics 2 0 4 4

PRACTICAL

7. 15BS151 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15GE151 Computer Programming Laboratory 0 0 4 2

9. 15GE152 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 17 2 18 27

SEMESTER II – Civil Engineering

SL.

NO.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. 15HS201 Technical English – II* 3 0 0 3

2. 15BS201 Mathematics – II* 3 2 0 4

3. 15BS202 Environmental Science and Disaster Management* 3 0 0 3

4. 15BS203

Applied Materials Science

(Common to Civil / Mechanical) 3 0 0 3

5. 15GE201

Engineering Mechanics

(Common to Civil / Mechanical) 3 2 0 4

6. 15GE202

Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering

(Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech) 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15CS251 Computer Programming Lab in C++ 0 0 4 2

8. 15CE251 Computer Aided Building Drawing – I 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 4 8 24

* Common to all UG Programmes

SEMESTER- III


THEORY

1. 15MA301

Mathematics-III-Transforms and partial differential

equations

3 2 0 4

2. 15CE301 Construction Materials and techniques 3 0 0 3

3. 15CE302 Mechanics of Solids 3 2 0 4

4. 15CE303 Soil Mechanics 3 2 0 4

5. 15CE304 Surveying 3 0 0 3

6. 15CE305 Engineering Geology 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15CE351 Survey Practical –I 0 0 4 2

8. 15CE352 Soil Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 4 2

9. 15HS351 Presentation Skills Laboratory 0 0 2 1

TOTAL 18 3 10 26

22

SEMESTER- IV


THEORY

1. 15MA401 Mathematics IV - Numerical Methods 3 2 0 4

2. 15CE401 Strength of Materials 3 2 0 4

3. 15CE402 Mechanics of Fluids and Machinery 3 2 0 4

4. 15CE403 Foundation Engineering 3 0 0 3

5. 15CE404 Highways and Railways 3 0 0 3

6. 15CE405 Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15CE451 Survey Practical –II 0 0 4 2

8. 15CE452 Strength of Materials Laboratory 0 0 4 2

9. 15CE453 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 3 12 27

SEMESTER V


THEORY

1. 15CE501 Structural Analysis–I 3 2 0 4

2. 15CE502 Design of Reinforced Concrete Elements 3 0 0 3

3. 15CE503 Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3

4. Core Elective I 3 0 0 3

5. Open Elective I 3 0 0 3

6. Allied Elective I 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15CE551 Concrete and Highway Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15CE552 Computer Aided Building Drawing - II 0 0 4 2

9. 15HS541 Professional Communication Skills Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 1 12 25

SEMESTER VI


THEORY

1. 15CE601 Structural Analysis–II 3 2 0 4

2. 15CE602 Design of Steel Structures 3 2 0 4

3. 15CE603 Environmental Engineering 3 0 0 3

4. Core Elective II 3 0 0 3

5. Open Elective II 3 0 0 3

6. Allied Elective II 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15CE651 Civil Software application Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15CE652 Environmental Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 3 8 24

23

SEMESTER VII


THEORY

1. 15CE701 Estimation and Quantity Surveying 3 2 0 4

2. 15CE702 Construction Planning and Management 3 0 0 3

3. Core Elective III 3 0 0 3

4. Core Elective IV 3 0 0 3

5. Core Elective V 3 0 0 3

6. Open Elective III 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15CE751 Design Project 0 0 4 2

8. 15CE752 Computer Aided Design and Drafting Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 1 8 23

SEMESTER VIII


THEORY

1. Core Elective VI 3 0 0 3

2. Open Elective IV 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

3. 15CE851 Main Project 0 0 12 6

TOTAL 6 0 12 12

Total Credits: 188 (Regular)

Total Credits: 137 (LES)

CORE ELECTIVE – I (V Semester)


1. 15CEC01 Advanced Construction Materials 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEC02 Advanced Surveying 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEC03 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEC04 Hydropower Engineering 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEC05 Airport, Docks and Harbour Engineering 3 0 0 3

CORE ELECTIVE – II (VI Semester)


1. 15CEC06 Mathematical Statistics 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEC07 Architecture 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEC08 Construction Safety Practices 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEC09 Ground water Hydrology 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEC10 Housing Planning and Management 3 0 0 3

6. 15CEC11 Remote Sensing and GIS

24

CORE ELECTIVE – III (VII Semester)


1. 15CEC12 Advanced Design of RC Structures 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEC13 Air pollution Management 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEC14 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEC15 Coastal Zone Management 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEC16 Contracts Laws and regulations 3 0 0 3

CORE ELECTIVE – IV (VII Semester)

1. 15CEC17 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEC18 Concepts of Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEC19 Pavement management Systems 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEC20 Fundamentals of Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEC21 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3

CORE ELECTIVE – V (VII Semester)

1. 15CEC22 Smart Materials and measuring techniques 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEC23 Introduction to Structural Dynamics 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEC24 Waste Water Engineering 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEC25 Water Resources System planning and management 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEC26 Design of Prestressed Concrete elements 3 0 0 3

CORE ELECTIVE – VI (VIII Semester)


1. 15CEC27 Interior Decoration 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEC28 Risk and Value Management 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEC29 Solid and Hazardous Management 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEC30 Traffic Planning and Management 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEC31 Elements of Industrial structures 3 0 0 3

Allied Elective Courses offered to other Departments

Offered by EEE Department

V Semester

SL.

NO.

COURSE CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P C

VI Semester

SL.

NO. COURSE

CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3

2. 15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization 3 0 0 3

3. 15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications 3 0 0 3

4. 15EEA09 Fundamentals of Power Quality 3 0 0 3

5. 15EEA10 Wiring, Estimation and Costing 3 0 0 3

1. 15EEA01 Industrial Instrumentation 3 0 0 3

2. 15EEA02 Illumination Engineering 3 0 0 3

3. 15EEA03 Switched Mode Power Converters 3 0 0 3

4. 15EEA04 Power Plant Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3

5. 15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives 3 0 0 3

25

Offered by ECE Department

V SEMESTER

SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15ECA01 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3

2. 15ECA02 Microprocessors and Applications 3 0 0 3

3. 15ECA03 MATLAB Programming 2 0 2 3

4. 15ECA04 Antenna Fundamentals 3 0 0 3

5. 15ECA05 Television Engineering 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER

SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15ECA06 Remote Sensing Techniques 3 0 0 3

2. 15ECA07 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3

3. 15ECA08 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3

4. 15ECA09 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3

5. 15ECA10 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3

Offered by CSE Department

V SEMESTER

SL NO.

COURSE CODE


1. 15CSA01 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3

2. 15CSA02 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 3 0 0 3

3. 15CSA03 Introduction to Database 3 0 0 3

4. 15CSA04 Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3

5. 15CSA05 Fundamentals of Operating Systems 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER

SL NO.

COURSE CODE


1. 15CSA06 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3

2. 15CSA07 Principles of Multimedia 3 0 0 3

3. 15CSA08 Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 3 0 0 3

4. 15CSA09 XML Programming 3 0 0 3

5. 15CSA10 Introduction to UML 3 0 0 3

6. 15CSA11 Introduction to Computer Organization 3 0 0 3

Offered by Mechanical Department

V SEMESTER

SL.

NO. COURSE


THEORY

1. 15MEA01 Automotive Maintenance and Pollution Control 3 0 0 3

2. 15MEA02 Fundamentals of Energy Resources 3 0 0 3

3. 15MEA03 Manufacturing for Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3

26

4. 15MEA04 Human Factors in Engineering 3 0 0 3

5. 15MEA05 Decision Support Systems 3 0 0 3

6. 15MEA06 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3

7. 15MEA07 Nano Technology 3 0 0 3

8. 15MEA08 Fuel Cell & Hydrogen Energy 3 0 0 3

9. 15MEA09 Bio-Mechanics and human body vibration 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER

SL.

NO. COURSE


THEORY

1. 15MEA10 Fundamentals of Thermal Science 3 0 0 3

2. 15MEA11 Fundamentals of Lithography 3 0 0 3

3. 15MEA12 Fundamentals of Fire Safety Engineering 3 0 0 3

4. 15MEA13 High Energetic material - Propellants 3 0 0 3

5. 15MEA14 Direct Digital Manufacturing 3 0 0 3

6. 15MEA15 Instrumental Analysis of Materials 3 0 0 3

7. 15MEA16 Basics of Aircraft and Space Technology 3 0 0 3

8. 15MEA17 Introduction to MATLAB with Engineering Applications 3 0 0 3

9. 15MEA18 Micro and Nano Fabrication 3 0 0 3

10. 15MEA19 Fundamentals of Nature Inspired Algorithms 3 0 0 3

11. 15MEA20 Energy Efficient Buildings 3 0 0 3

12. 15MEA21 Water Treatment Technology 3 0 0 3

Offered by IT Department

V SEMESTER

SL.

NO.

COURSE CODE


1. 15ITA01 Introduction to Computer Graphics 3 0 0 3

2. 15ITA02 Rich Internet Application 3 0 0 3

3. 15ITA03 Introduction to Java 3 0 0 3

4. 15ITA04 Perl 3 0 0 3

5. 15ITA05 Fuzzy Systems 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER

SL.

NO.

COURSE CODE


1. 15ITA06 Graphics Programming 3 0 0 3

2. 15ITA07 PHP Programming 3 0 0 3

3. 15ITA08 Android Application Development 3 0 0 3

4. 15ITA09 Python Programming 3 0 0 3

5. 15ITA10 Decision Making Methods 3 0 0 3

Offered by Bio-Tech Department

V SEMESTER

SL.

NO. COURSE


1. 15BTA01 Basic Cell and Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3

2. 15BTA02 Basic Microbiology 3 0 0 3

3. 15BTA03 Basic Biochemistry 3 0 0 3

4. 15BTA04 Basic immunology 3 0 0 3

27

VI SEMESTER

SL.

NO. COURSE


1. 15BTA05 Chemicals in Environment and Public Health 3 0 0 3

2. 15BTA06 Biological Waste Management 3 0 0 3

3. 15BTA07 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3

4. 15BTA08 Human Physiology 3 0 0 3

Offered by MBA Department

VI SEMESTER

SL.

NO. COURSE


1. 15BAA01 Essentials of Finance 3 0 0 3

2. 15BAA02 Essentials of Marketing 3 0 0 3

3. 15BAA03 Essentials of Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3

28

I Semester

15HS101 Technical English – I

(Common to all UG Programmes)

L T P C

3 0 2 4

Course Objectives are to:

enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

improve grammatical accuracy

develop language functions

understand the basic nuances of language

Course Outcomes:

The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary

Grammatical accuracy will be improved

Language functions will be developed

The basic nuances of language will be understood

UNIT I 12

Listening–Importance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;

Speaking -Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family / friend; Asking

for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing -

Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completion-

Autobiographical writing (writing about one’s leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;

Grammar–Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word

expansion

UNIT II 12

Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone

conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on

various everyday activities: Telephone skills – Telephone etiquette. Reading – Critical reading - Finding key

information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and

thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter – Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions

– Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)

Grammar– tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary –prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.

UNIT III 12

Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /

documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.

Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation

Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing– Coherence and cohesion in writing- -

Channel conversion -Process descriptions – interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and

tables - Essay writing – Different types of essays. Grammar– Articles - Connective adverbs – Subject-verb

agreement-; Vocabulary – Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association

UNIT IV 12

Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding

29

to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading -

Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;

Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and

Adjustment Letters. Grammar – Preposition – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use

of abbreviations & acronyms.

UNIT V 12

Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample

interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email

communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through

email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,

Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar –Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items

(fixed / semi fixed expressions).

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.

Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.

2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.

Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.

3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,

New Delhi, 2007.

4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition

(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.

Extensive reading:

1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.

15BS101 MATHEMATICS I


L T P C

3 2 0 4


To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications

To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she

will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in

mathematical modeling

To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems

To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in

engineering problems

To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage

30

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the students are able to

Expertise matrix algebra

Apply tests of convergence

Understand and apply functions of several variables

Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions

Expertise multiple integrals and their usage

UNIT 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0

Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable

UNIT I MATRICES 9 + 3

Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix– Properties of eigen values and

eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to

canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9 + 3

Partial derivatives –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem-Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit

functions-Change of variables - Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for

functions of two variables – Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –

Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers

UNIT III INFINITE SERIES 9 + 3

Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:

Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating

series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series –

Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series

UNIT IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9 + 3

Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Evaluation of integrals involving one

parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma functions – Properties – Evaluation of integrals using Beta and

Gamma functions – Error functions

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9 + 3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area enclosed by

plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of Solids

L= 45 hours T = 15 hours Total = 60 hours

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd

Edition, 2013

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,

9th

Edition, 2013

31

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,

4th

Edition, 2014

2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition,

11th

Reprint, 2013

3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th

Edition, 2012

4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit – 2,3,5)

5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company, New Delhi, 11th

Reprint, 2010

15BS102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS


L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objective

To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.

To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology

To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.

Course Outcomes:

The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.

The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.

The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as

acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.

UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses-

factors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of

Young’s modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow

cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and

irregular).

UNIT II ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -

decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s

formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,

interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -

magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -

NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.

UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in

solids - Forbe’s and Lees’ disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a

compound media - radial flow of heat – thermal insulation of buildings – Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoff’s

law, Stephens law, Wien’s law, Raleigh-Jean’s law and Planck’s law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics -

Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnot’s cycle - reverse Carnot’s cycle -

refrigerator.

32

UNIT IV APPLIED OPTICS 9

Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - anti-

reflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and

semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers -

classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and

numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.

UNIT V SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9

Growth of single crystals-Czochralski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,

Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -

coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and

significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking

faults.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.

2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.

3. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.

4. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics –

Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.

5. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley and

Sons, New Delhi, 2010.

15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY


L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objective

The student should be familiar with

The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.

The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.

The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.

Different materials and their engineering applications.

Different types of fuels and combustion.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment

processes for domestic and industrial applications.

33

Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.

Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.

Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.

Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.

UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and

estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water – requirements –

disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – scales and sludges – caustic embrittlement

– boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,

carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination,

Ozonation, UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9

Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential

– Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion

selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series –

significance – potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak

acid Vs Strong base)

UNIT III CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9

Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors

influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – erosion corrosion – pitting corrosion – crevice

corrosion – waterline corrosion – stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current

cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – metallic coating – pretreatment of surface –

hotdipping – spraying – cladding – cementation – electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating

(electroless nickel plating only).

UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9

Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness

under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia

bricks.

Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud

and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semi solid lubricants and

emulsions.

Nanomaterials – introduction to nano chemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications.

UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate

analysis – Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and

methods – knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius

processes – Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion –

theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16th

Edition, New

Delhi (2013).

2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).

34

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi

(2009).

2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).

3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).

15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING


L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

To learn how to write modular and readable C programs

To understand the usage of arrays and strings

To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory

To exploit the notion of derived data types and files

Course Outcomes:

Solve problems using sound techniques

Develop modular C programs for a given problem

Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings

Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs

Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures

Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9

Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow

Chart.

Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,

Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)

UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9

Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching

statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes

UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8

Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String

operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)

UNIT IV POINTERS IN C 10

Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic -

Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,

Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments

35

UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9

Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit

fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford

University Press, 2009

2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010

reprint.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2006 reprint.

2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008

3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint

4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.

5. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.

6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm

2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html

3. http://www.w3schools.in/c

4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners

15GE102 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS


L T P C

2 0 4 4

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.

To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design of

Engineering products.

To draw the drawing of various solids.

To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.

An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.

Course Outcomes:

Sketch multiple views of Engineering components

Create the projection of point, straight line and plane

Project the solid objects

Section the solid

Develop lateral surfaces of solids

Apply isometric and perspective projections

36

Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination) 5

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS

conventions and specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC

VIEWS

14

Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection

of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by

eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of

tangents and normal to the above curves.

Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout

of views– Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and

Engineering Components.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 14

First Angle projection–Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle

projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating

line method and traces.

Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position

method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 14

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the

principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.

UNIT IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL

SURFACES OF SOLIDS

14

Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal

planes and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.

Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of

lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 14

Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale –Isometric View– Isometric projections of simple solids and

cut solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones– Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.

Perspective projection of simple solids–Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.

TOTAL: 75 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 50th

Edition, (2010).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.

2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an

introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.

3. Shah M.B. and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.

4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.

5. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.

6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi, 2008.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing

37

sheets.

2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.

3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.

4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.

5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.

6.

Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.

2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.

3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted

to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.

4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY


(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus

To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper

To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity

To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water

To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration

Course Outcomes:

Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper

Find the specific resistance of wire

Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample

Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration

Find corrosion rate

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.

2. Non-uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination

3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper

4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating

5. Lee’s disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor

6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic

interferometer.

7. Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.

38

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method

2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample

3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)

4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)

5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)

6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate

7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,

Prentice Hall, India, 2000.

2. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.

15GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY


L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements

To understand the principles of arrays and strings

To learn to access memory using pointers

To group different kinds of information related to a single entity

To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage

Course Outcomes:

Implement programs using control statements

Write programs using arrays and strings

Access data in memory using pointers

Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data

Manipulate data stored on permanent storage

SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:

1. Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation

2. Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End

Examination)

3. Programs using simple statements

4. Programs using decision making statements

5. Programs using looping statements

6. Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions

7. Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays

39

8. Solving problems using string functions

9. Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation

10. Programs using structures and unions

11. Programs using pointers to structures and other data types

12. Programs using text files

13. Programs using binary files

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford

University Press, 2009

2. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2006 reprint.

3. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010

reprint.

4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009

5. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm

2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html

3. http://www.w3schools.in/c

4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners

15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY


L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering practices in

Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.

To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting

To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.

To have a practice on soldering

Course Outcomes:

Do pipe connections with different joining components.

Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture

Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models

Do residential house wiring

40

Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment

Apply soldering

GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)

I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9

Buildings:

Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.

Plumbing Works:

1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and elbows

in household fittings.

2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.

3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.

4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with

different joining components.

5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.

6.

Carpentry using Power Tools only:

1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.

2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.

II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

Welding:

Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.

Basic Machining:

1. Simple Turning, Step turning

2. Drilling Practice using drilling machine.

Sheet Metal Work:

1. Forming & Bending:

2. Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.

3. Different type of joints.

Machine assembly practice:

1. Study of centrifugal pump

2. Study of air conditioner

Demonstration on:

1. Gas welding practice

2. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –Exercise – Production of

41

hexagonal headed bolt.

3. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.

4. Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.

GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10

1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.

2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.

3. Stair case wiring

4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.

5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.

6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.

IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal

parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.

2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.

3. Generation of Clock Signal.

4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.

5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,

Anuradha Publications, (2007).

2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas Publishing

House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)

3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).

4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).

5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, (1999).

SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN

The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with

a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in

the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for

the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,

based on lots.

42

List of equipment and components

(For a Batch of 30 Students)

CIVIL ENGINEERING

1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes,

flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.

15 Sets.

2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.

3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.

4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each

5. Power Tools:

(a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos.

(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.

(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos.

(d) Planer 2 Nos.

(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.

(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.

2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.

3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.

4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit. 2 Nos.

5. Centre lathe 10 Nos.

6. Drilling machine 2 Nos.

7. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets

8. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets

9. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.

10. . Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each.

ELECTRICAL

1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 10 Sets

2. Electrical measuring instruments 15 Sets.

3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each

4. Megger (250V/500V). 1 No.

5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos.

(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos.

ELECTRONICS

1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.

2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.

3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.

4. Multimeters 10 Nos.

5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply 2 Nos.

43

II Semester

15HS201 Technical English –II


L T P C

3 0 0 3


make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills

strengthen LSRW skills

boost up creative and critical thinking

master the skills of writing

face the challenges of the competitive world

Course Outcomes:

The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills

Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched

The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world

UNIT I 15

Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and

answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn

taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal

experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.

Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using ‘emoticons’ as

symbols in messages - e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar – Regular and irregular verbs - Modal

verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary – Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.

UNIT II 7

Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.

Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving

directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film

(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students’

dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;

Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article -

Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses -

Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences– Conjunctions. Vocabulary :

Descriptive words & phrases,

UNIT III 6

Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of

conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning –

Seeking information – expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading – reading

passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting – format and practice in the preparation of

minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech

- Active and passive voice - American and British English.

Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.

44

UNIT IV 7

Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic

and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking

questions, -note taking – passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills;

Telephonic interview – recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the

company concerned. Writing - Applying for a job – cover letter - résumé preparation – vision, mission and goals

of the candidate; e-résumé writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions -

discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings – Using

idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements

UNIT V 10

Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the

characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills –assertiveness in

expressing opinions – mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of

written materials. Writing – Itinerary - Checklist - report writing – recommendations / suggestions – interpretation

of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. Grammar–Infinitives and Gerunds - Cause

and effect expressions. Vocabulary – Collocation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.

Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.

2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.

Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.

3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,

New Delhi, 2007.

4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition

(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.

Extensive reading:

1. Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.

15BS201 MATHEMATICS II (Common to all UG Programmes)

L T P C

3 2 0 4


To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations

obtained from engineering problems

To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering

disciplines

To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them

with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the

electric current

45

To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it

is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the students are able to

Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations

Solve engineering problems using vector calculus

Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.

Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently

UNIT 0 (Not for Examinations) 5+0

Reviews of integration concepts

UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Method of variation of parameters –Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogeneous equation of Euler’s

and Legendre’s type – System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients

UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3

Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line

integral over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’

theorems (excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals

UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3

Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –

Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z, and

- Bilinear transformation.

UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3

Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues

– Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and

semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis

UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3

Laplace transform – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transform of derivatives and

integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution

theorem –Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients

TOTAL: 65 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43rd

edition (2013)

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9th

Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,

46

4th

Edition, 2014

2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition,

11th

Reprint, 2013


Edition, 2012

4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit – 1,2)

5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,

11th

Reprint, 2010

15BS202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT

(Common to all UG Programme)

L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

The student is expected to understand

What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve

these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful

environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve

bio-diversity.

The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.

About Disaster and its management.

Course Outcomes:


Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.

Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.

Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.

Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.

Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL

RESOURCES

9

Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,

deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –

Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,

dams – benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and

using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture

and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies

– Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate

energy sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of

resources for sustainable lifestyles

UNIT II ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10

Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –

Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –

Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity –

47

Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,

social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a mega-

diversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife

conflicts – Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ

conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12

Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)

Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban

and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.

Unsustainable and Sustainable development – Unsustainable practices – Issues – possible solutions – Water

conservation, rain water harvesting – Environmental ethics –Acts for Prevention of Environmental Pollution –

Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Air

(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues involved in enforcement of

environmental legislation – Public awareness.

UNIT IV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7

Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,

cyclones, tsunami and drought) – Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts

(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7

Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation,

preparedness, relief, recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste

management, disease control) – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and

NGOs.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,

Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.

2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.

3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.

4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.

5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International

(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.

6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.

2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I

and II, Enviro Media.

3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,

2001.

4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.

5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,

New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.

6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.

7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Wendell+P.+Ela&search-alias=books&text=Wendell+P.+Ela&sort=relevancerank

48

15BS203 APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE

(Common to Civil and Mechanical Engineering)

L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

To introduce the essential principles of material science for Mechanical and related Engineering

applications

To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering Materials for

industrial applications in terms of their structure and properties

To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech Engineering materials

Course Outcomes:

The students are able to understand the crystal structure and structure related properties of the

materials

The students will acquire knowledge about magnetic and superconducting materials

The students will acquire knowledge about the non-ferrous materials like polymers and ceramics

The students will acquire knowledge about the composite materials

The students are able to understand the application of nano devices

UNIT I PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MATERIALS 9

Crystal imperfections: point, line, planar and volume defects–Frank Reed source of dislocations–Plastic and

elastic deformation, twinning, cold/hot work hardening–Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth–grain size,

ASTM grain size number–Strengthening methods–Strain hardening–Refinement of the grain size–Solid solution

strengthening–Precipitation hardening

UNIT II MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9

Origin of magnetic moment–Bohr magneton–Dia and para magnetism–Ferro magnetism–Domain theory–

Hysteresis–Soft and hard magnetic materials–antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications

Superconductivity: properties–Types–BCS theory (qualitative) –High Tc superconductors –Application of

superconductors–SQUID, cryotron, magnetic levitation.

UNIT III POLYMERIC AND CERAMIC MATERIALS 9

Polymers–Types of polymers–Thermal, Mechanical, Electrical and Viscoelastic Properties–Conducting Polymers,

Bio-Polymers and High temperature polymers and their applications Engineering ceramics–Properties and

applications–ZrO2, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4

UNIT IV COMPOSITE MATERIALS 9

Definition–function of matrix and reinforcement in composites–classification of composites based on

reinforcement–types of composite materials–polymers, metallic and ceramic matrix composites. Law of mixtures.

Comparison with conventional materials. Fabrication of metal matrix and ceramic matrix composites–properties

and uses.

UNIT V NANOMATERIALS 9

Introduction–low dimensional structures–quantum well, wires and dots–Electronic and optical properties–

nanoclusters and nanocrystals–properties of nanomaterials. Synthesis–CVD, electrodeposition, sol-gel.

Fabrication and characterization of nano electronic devices and MEMS. CNT– Fabrication techniques–properties

and applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

49

TEXTBOOKS:

1. William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New

Delhi, 2010

2. Kasap, S.O., Principle of electronic materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007

3. Koch C, Nanostructured materials: processing, properties and applications, William Andrew Pub., 2008

4. The Science and Engineering of Materials, Sixth Edition, Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep, P. Fulay,

Wendelin J. Wright, SI Edition Prepared by D.K. Bhattacharya

5. Cengage Learning, 2011

6. Ragavan, V. Material science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kenneth G. Budinski and Micheal K. Budinski, Engineering Materials, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

2. Flinn R. A. and Trojan P.K. Engineering Materials and their application, Wiley, 2009.

3. Pradeep T. Nano: The essential, McGraw Hill Professional, 2012.

4. J.C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, P. Leevers, R. D. Rawlings, Material Science of Engineers, 5th

Edition,

Nelson Thomas Ltd. UK, 2003.

5. Polymer Science and Technology, Third Edition, by Joel R. Fried, Prentice Hall; 3 Edition, 2014.

15GE201

ENGINEERING MECHANICS

(Common to Civil / Mechanical)

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments

To apply static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three

dimensions.

To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.

To understand the principle of work and energy, the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion.

To write the dynamic equilibrium equation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course the student will be able to

Understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments

Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions.

Understand the principle of work and energy.

Comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.

Understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the interrelationship.

Write the dynamic equilibrium equation.

UNIT I BASICS & EQUILIBRIUM OF PARTICLES 12

Introduction – Rigid Bodies –Laws of Mechanics – Lame’s theorem, Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces

,Principle of transmissibility – Coplanar Forces – Resolution and Composition of forces – Equivalent systems of

forces – Single equivalent– force Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space –

Vectorial representation of forces.

50

UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12

Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable equilibrium – Moments and

Couples – Scalar components of a moment– Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial

representation of moments and couples –– Varignon’s theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions –

Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions – Examples.

UNIT III FRICTION 12

Frictional force – Laws of Coulomb friction – simple contact friction –Sliding Friction–Inclined planes–Angle of

Repose– Belt friction – Ladder friction– Wedge Friction– Rolling resistance.

UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12

Significance of properties of Sections - First moment of area and the Centroid of Simple sections – Rectangle,

circle, triangle from integration method– T section, I section, – Angle section, Hollow section by using standard

formula – Theorem of Pappus Guldinus– Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem - Second and

product moments of plane area – Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration method – T section, I section, Angle

section, Hollow section by using standard formula –Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of

plane areas – Principal axes of inertia – mass moment of inertia of solid rectangular prisms, cylinders and cones.

UNIT V DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES & RIGID BODIES 12

Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion – Newton’s

law of motion – D’Alembert principle – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum – Impact of

elastic bodies. General Plane motion–Translation and rotation of rigid bodies.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers”, Vol. 1 Statics and Vol. 2 Dynamics,

McGraw–Hill International Edition, 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., “Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics”, Vikas Publishing

House Pvt. Ltd., 2000.

2. Hibbeller, R.C., “Engineering Mechanics”, Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt.

Ltd., 2000.

3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics”, Tata McGraw–Hill,

2001.

4. MeriamJ.L, KraigeL.G, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics”, 6th

Edition, Wiley, 2010.

5. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd.,

4th

Edition, 2003.

6. Ashok Gupta, “Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor (CDROM)”, Pearson

Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002.

51

15GE202 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering

(Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the students to have a clear knowledge of the basic electrical and electronics engineering.

To analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.

To understand the operating principles of measuring instruments.

To familiarize the construction, working principle, EMF equation of DC machines, single phase

transformer, alternator, synchronous motor and induction motor.

To acquaint the students with construction, operation, characteristics and applications of semiconductor

devices.

To make the students understand the concepts of logic gates and their applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

Analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.

Apply the basic laws governing the operation of the instruments.

Demonstrate about DC machines, AC machines and its applications.

Analyze and compare the construction, theory and characteristics of the semiconductor devices.

Design basic combinational and sequential logic circuits.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASUREMENTS 12

Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s Laws –Reduction of series and parallel circuits-Mesh and Nodal Analysis of DC circuits –

Introduction to AC Circuits - RMS Value, Average value, Form factor and peak factor phasor representation – Single

Phase AC series circuits with R,RL, RC & RLC- Power and Power factor. Introduction to three phase circuits- Star

and delta connected balanced load.

Electrical measurements - Introduction, Operating torques, Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron

Instruments, Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meter.

UNIT II DC MACHINES & TRANSFORMER (Qualitative treatment only) 8

DC Generators - construction, principle of operation, Types, EMF equations and applications. DC Motors -

operation, Types, Speed and torque equation – speed control of DC shunt motors. Single Phase Transformer -

Constructional details and operation, Types, EMF equation, transformation ratio.

UNIT III AC MACHINES (Qualitative treatment only) 8

Synchronous generators - construction and operation, EMF equation - Synchronous motors – principle of

operation. Three phase induction motor – Types, Construction and operation, Torque equation, slip torque

characteristics, Single phase induction motor - construction, operation and applications.

UNIT IV SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS (Qualitative

treatment only)

9

Introduction to semiconductors-PN Junction Diode – characteristics, breakdown effect and applications - Half wave

and Full wave rectifiers, Zener Diode - characteristics and voltage regulator. Bipolar Junction Transistor – operation

of NPN and PNP, characteristics of CB, CE, CC configurations. Transducer - Thermistor, Thermocouple, Hall

effect, peltier effect.

UNIT V DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (Qualitative treatment only) 8

Number System – Binary, octal, hexadecimal, Logic Gates (AND, OR,NOT,NAND,NOR,XOR,XNOR), Half and Full

Adders – Flip-Flops –RS, JK, T and D - Counters – synchronous up counter, synchronous down counter,

asynchronous up counter, asynchronous down counter, shift registers – shift right and shift left register

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

52

TEXTBOOKS:

1. V N Mittle, Arvind Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.

2. R.S. Sedha, “A Textbook of Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S, “Basic Electrical, Electronics and Computer Engineering”,

McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University press (2012).

3. V K Mehta, Rohit mehta “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (2015).

4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series, McGrawHill,

(2014).

15CS251 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

LABORATORY IN C++

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basic concepts of object-oriented programming.

To study about the constructor, destructor concepts and operator overloading.

To know the Inheritances and virtual functions.

To know the different methods of exception handling.

To expertise in different methods of file handling and template concepts.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the student will be able to

Describe oops concepts.

Design the class with constructor and destructors.

Design the class with operator overloading and function overloading.

Implement run time polymorphism.

Handle exceptions

Use file handling mechanisms.

Work with function and class template.

SYLLABUS FOR THE LAB:

1. Programs Using Functions with default arguments

2. Program using Classes, objects, member functions, Constructors

& destructor.

3. Program using static data members and static member function.

4. Programs using Dynamic memory allocation

5. Programs using friend function.

6. Program using function overloading and Operator Overloading including Unary and Binary Operators.

53

7. Program using inheritance.

8. Program using virtual function and virtual base classes.

9. Program using function templates and class templates

10. Program using Exception handling mechanism.

11. Programs using Sequential and Random access files.

12. Mini Project.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. H.M.Deitel, P.J.Deitel, “C++ : how to program”, Sixth edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 2012

2. Yashavant Kanetkar, “Understanding Pointers In C”, 4th Edition, 2008, Bpb Publications.

3. Herbert Schildt, "the C++ : Complete Reference", Fourth edition, TMH, 2002.

4. K.R.Venugopal, Rajkumar Buyya, T.Ravishankar, "Mastering C++", TMH, 2003.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.cplusplus.com/doc/tutorial/

2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c++-tutorial.html

3. http://www.learncpp.com/

4. http://www.stroustrup.com/C++.html

5. http://en.cppreference.com/w/ .

15CE251 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING I L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To provide knowledge on different views of components of a building.

To provide knowledge on various global symbols and sign conventions used in building drawing.

To familiarize the students with creating, modifying and annotating commands using software.

To enable the students to create plan, section and elevation of buildings using drafting software.

To enable the students to create drawings and to take print out using computer.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of this lab course the students will be able to

Have fundamental understanding of 2D and 3D views of buildings.

Understand the different views of the components of a building.

Familiarize with the standard symbols and sign conventions suitably.

Use create, modify and annotation commands.

Create plan, section and elevation of different buildings and take the print out.

54

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Part A

1. Drafting and annotation commands.

2. Simple Drawings I

3. Simple Drawings II.

4. Drawings using advanced commands

5. Simple Drawings III

PART B

Creation of geometrical drawing of following component of buildings:

1. Stepped wall footing and isolated RCC column footing

2. Fully panelled and flush doors

3. Half panelled and half-glazed window

4. RCC dog legged and open well stairs

5. Steel truss

PART C

Development of plan, elevation, section and schedule of openings from the given line diagram of residential

building.

REFERENCE BOOK

1. Sikka V.B., “A Course in Civil Engineering Drawing”, 4th edition, S.K.Kataria & Sons, New Delhi, 1998.

2. Shah M.G. Kale C.M. & Patki S.Y., “Building Drawing with an Integrated Approach to Built Environment”,

4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi, 2002.

3. Shah.M.G., “Building drawing” –Tata McGraw-Hill,1992

4. Kumaraswamy N., Kameswara Rao A., “Building planning & Drawing”, Charotar Publishing, 2013.

5. Varma B.P “Civil Engineering Drawing & House Planning”, Khanna publishers, Delhi – 11th

edition.

IS CODES :

1. IS: 962 – 1967 Code of Practical for Architectural and Building Drawing.

2. IS: 4021 – 1983 Specification for Timber Door, Window and Ventilator Frames

3. IS: 6523 – 1983 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Door and Window Frames

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Note: Plotting of diagrams must be completed for each exercise and attached to the records written by students.

55

III Semester

15MA301 MATHEMATICS III - TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know a sound knowledge on Partial Differential Equations.

To acquaint the student with the concepts of Fourier series that is needed for problems in engineering

disciplines.

To know the standard techniques for solving boundary value problem.

To familiarize the student with Fourier transform this is used to solve problems in engineering and technology.

To know the standard techniques for solving difference equations.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course, the students are able to

Solve various Partial Differential Equations.

Know to express any periodic functions as a series of well known periodic functions sine and cosine.

Obtain the solution of boundary value problem such as displacement of string and heat conduction.

Use Fourier transform in engineering applications.

Obtain the solution of difference equations using Z- transforms.

UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation of PDE – Solutions of first order PDE – Lagrange’s linear PDE -Standard types and equations

reducible to standard types – Singular solution –– Classification of second order PDE – Solution of second and

higher order linear homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential

equations with constant coefficients.

UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and Cosine series –

Parseval’s identity – Harmonic Analysis – Complex form of Fourier series.

UNIT III BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PDE 12

Method of separation of variables – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and one dimensional heat

equation – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat equation – Fourier series solutions in Cartesian

coordinates.

UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORM 12

Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transform of

elementary functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.

UNIT V Z - TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12

Z-transform - Elementary properties - Inverse Z-transform - Convolution theorem - Initial and Final value

theorems - Formation of difference equation - Solution of difference equation using Z-transform.

TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS

56

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition, 2013.

2. Gupta, S.C., and Kapoor, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand and Sons. New

Delhi, Reprint 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An imprint of

Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2011.


Edition, 2012.

3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 4th Edition,

2010.

4. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random

Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2014.

5. Oliver C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd, New

Delhi, Reprint-2012.

15CE301 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND TECHNIQUES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give complete exposure on stones and their suitability.

To get idea on damp proofing materials, timber and roofing materials

To study the various construction techniques and practices in field.

To have exposure on sub-structure, super structure, industrial structure constructions.

To explore the suitability of equipment employed in different ground conditions.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the students will be able to

Select suitable type of stones, bricks, lime and ceramic materials

Choose effective timber, roofing, damp and water proofing materials in the field

Practice various construction techniques in the field

Execute projects related to industrial structures.

Employ an appropriate equipment towards speedy completion of projects

UNIT I BASIC BUILDING MATERIALS AND CEMENTS 9

Stones: classification - composition and mineral constituents - properties and tests - artificial stones

Bricks: brick earth - composition and harmful constituents - manufacturing process, classification - sampling and

testing - properties - brick substitutes

Lime: production - cementing action - classification - properties and tests

Cement and Ceramics: – manufacturing process – type and grades - ceramic products - floor tiles - sanitary

appliances - roof tiles - acid and chemical resistant products - mineral binders - air setting and hydraulic binders

57

UNIT II MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 9

Damp proofing and Moisture proofing: Paints, varnishes, distempers and adhesives and sealants - organic

binders: bitumen, tars, emulsions and mastics - polymers and plastics: walls, pipes and sanitary ware, glues and

mastics

Timber: market forms and industrial products - physical properties, seasoning and preservative treatment -

plywood - pressed wood - particle board - hard board - fibre board - lamina board

Ferrous metals: Iron and steel, basic metallurgy, composition and grades, market forms and heat treatment -

Steel as reinforcement - Corrosion of metals and protection

Non-ferrous metals: Aluminium, copper, brass and glass products -properties - applications

UNIT III CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 9

Specifications - Construction co-ordination - Site clearance and marking - Foundations and basements - Masonry

- Bonds - Brick masonry - Stone masonry - Flooring - Construction joints - Movement and expansion joints -

Contraction joints - Form works - Centring and shuttering - Slip forms - Scaffoldings, shoring and underpinning -

Cable anchoring and grouting - Shoring for deep cutting

UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES 9

Sub structures: Trenchless techniques - Box jacking - Pipe jacking - Arch jacking - Tunnelling - Sheet piling -

Diaphragm walls - Coffer dams - Well foundation and caisson - Sinking operations - Piling techniques -

Super structures: Launching girders - Bridge decks - Heavy decks - Off shore platforms – Shells, domes and

braced domes - In-situ pre-stressing in high rise structures - Articulated structures - Space decks.

Industrial structures: Chimneys - Cooling towers - Silos - Bunkers - High tension transmission and

telecommunication towers - Support structures for heavy equipment and conveyors - Escalators - Conduits for oil

and fluids conveyance.

UNIT V CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 9

Earthwork - Earth moving operations - Selection of equipment – Earth equipment - Types - Tractors, motor

graders, scrapers, front end waders and earth movers - Equipment for soil compaction - Equipment for material

handling - Conveyors- Types- Foundation and Pile driving Equipment - Equipment for trenching, tunnelling and

dredging.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Edward Allen and Joseph Iano, “Fundamentals of Building Construction: Materials and Methods”, Wiley, 5th

Edition, 2008.

2. Arora S.P. and Bindra S.P., “The Text Book of Building Construction”, DhanpatRai and Sons, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Varghese, P.C., “Building construction”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Peurifoy, Schexnayder, Shapira, “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, Tata McGraw Hill

Education Private Ltd-7th edition, 2013.

3. National Building Code of India, Part V, "Building Materials”, 2005.

4. IS codes: 3495-1992, 712-1973, 6932-1973 Part I-II, 1624-1974, 287-1993, 459-1992, 277-2003.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Jha, J and Sinha, S.K., “Construction and Foundation Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2009.

58

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.theconstructor.org

2. http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/syllabus.php?subjectId=105102088

15CE302 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop understanding of the state of stresses and strains in structural components as a result of

different loading conditions.

To provide knowledge on shear force and bending moment for all statically determinate beams by

recognizing the beam type and loading.

To provide exposure on the concepts of internal stress in beams of various cross sections.

To have knowledge on analyzing the elements under complex state of stress by means of analytical and

graphical methods.

To develop knowledge on the behaviour of members subjected to pure torsion and shear.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course the students will be able to

Realize the state of stresses and strains in structural components under tension, compression and shear.

Plot the Shear force and bending moment diagrams for all the statically determinate beams.

Analyse the beam for internal stress.

Evaluate the elements subjected to complex state of stress by means of analytical and graphical methods.

Comprehend the behaviour of members under pure torsion and shear.

UNIT I TENSION, COMPRESSION AND SHEAR 9 + 3

Introduction - Normal stress and strain - Mechanical properties of materials - Elasticity, plasticity and creep -

Linear elasticity- Hooke’s law - Poisson’s ratio - Shear stress and strain - Elastic constants- Allowable stresses

and allowable loads - Thermal stresses in compound bars -Impact loading.

UNIT II SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT 9 + 3

Introduction - Types of beams, load and reactions - Shear force and bending moment - Relationships between

load, shear force and bending moment – Shear force and bending moment diagrams.

UNIT III STRESSES IN BEAMS 9 + 3

Introduction - Pure bending and non-uniform bending - Curvature of a beam - Longitudinal strains in beams -

Normal stresses in beams – Non- prismatic beams - Shear stresses in beams of rectangular, circular, T and I

section - Built-up beams and shear flow.

UNIT IV PRINCIPAL STRESS AND STRAIN 9 + 3

Plane stress - Principal stresses and maximum shear stress – Mohr’s circle for plane stress - Determination of

principal stresses and planes - plane strain - Applications of plane stress - Maximum stresses in beams-

Spherical and deviatory components of stress tensor – Determination of principal stresses and principal planes.

http://www.the/

59

UNIT V TORSION OF SHAFTS AND SPRING 9 + 3

Torsional deformations of a circular bar - Circular bars of linearly elastic materials – Non uniform torsion -

Stresses and strains in pure shear - transmission of power by circular shafts - Stepped shafts - Shafts fixed at

both ends - Strain energy in torsion and pure shear - Springs – Types- Helical and leaf springs – Stresses and

deflection of springs.


TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rajput.R.K. “Strength of Materials”, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Bhavikatti. S., "Solid Mechanics", Vikas publishing house Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bansal R.K. ”Strength of materials”, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Subramanian R. ”Strength of materials”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2005.

3. Ramamrutham, S.,”Strength of Materials”, DhanpatRai& Sons, 2008

4. William A. Nash, ”Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum’s Outline Series, Tata McGraw-Hill

publishing co., New Delhi, 2007.

5. Srinath L.S,” Advanced Mechanics of Solids”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2005.

6. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Solid Mechanics", PHI Learning Private Limited., New Delhi, 2009.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. Ugural. A.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

WEB REFERENCES

1. http://web.mst.edu/~mecmovie/

15CE303 SOIL MECHANICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide knowledge on the properties and classification of soil

To acquire knowledge on permeability of soil and stress distribution in soil media

To impart idea about various methods of compaction and consolidation of soil

To familiarize about behaviour of soil under shear

To be acquainted with stability analysis of slopes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course students will be able to

Classify the soil based on index properties

Assess the permeability characteristics of soil and calculate stress at any point in a soil media due to load

applied at the ground surface

Find out the settlement of the structure

Estimate the shear strength of various types of soil.

Analyze the stability of slopes using different methods.

60

UNIT I BASIC PROPERTIES OF SOIL 9

Introduction - Soil formation – Phase relation – Engineering and index properties - Grain size distribution –

Atterberg limits – Soil classification significance – BIS classification system

UNIT II PERMEABILITY AND STRESS DISTRIBUTION 9

Introduction- Permeability – Darcy’s law - Laboratory methods – Quick sand condition - Seepage – Laplace

equation - Flow nets – properties and applications - Stress distribution-effective stress concepts – Boussinesq’s

equation – Stress due to line load and circular and rectangular loaded area – Westergaard’s equation for point

load

UNIT III COMPACTION AND CONSOLIDATION 9

Introduction-compaction- Influencing factors - laboratory and field methods- Settlement - Components -

Terzaghi's one dimensional consolidation theory - Laboratory consolidation test – Field consolidation curve – NC

and OC clays - Final and time rate of consolidation

UNIT IV SHEAR STRENGTH 9

Introduction- Shear strength of soil – Mohr–coulomb’s theory – measurement of shear strength - Direct shear

test, UCC test, triaxial shear test and vane shear test - Shear strength of cohesive and cohesionless soil.

UNIT V SLOPE STABILITY 9

Slope failure mechanisms - Modes - Stress analysis - Infinite and finite slopes - Stability analysis for purely

cohesive and c-Ф soils - Method of slices – Friction circle method - Stability number – Slope protection measures.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. GopalRanjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International Publishers,

New Delhi, 2000.

2. Murthy, V.N.S., “Text Book of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Arora. K.R, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi,

2005.

2. Punmia B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 16th Edition,

(2005).

3. Venkataramaiah C, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.

4. Kaniraj, S.R, “Design aids in Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing

company Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.

5. Purushothama Raj. P., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. McCarthy D.F,“Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations”,6th

Edition,Prentice-Hall,NewJersey,2002.

61

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT- %20Guwahati/soil_mech/index.html

2. http://www.eng.fsu.edu/~tawfiq/soilmech/lecture.html

3. http://aboutcivil.org/soil-mechanics/soil-mechanics-1-high.pdf

15CE304 SURVEYING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the basics of linear and angular measurements using chain and compass.

To impart the basics of levelling and its applications.

To study the applications of theodolite survey in linear and angular measurements.

To provide the knowledge on the utility of tachometric surveying by various methods.

To understand the elements of different types of curves on roads and their significance.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Carry out preliminary surveying to prepare a layout of a given area.

Plot LS, CS and Contouring using leveling applications.

Execute a theodolite traverse.

Find heights and distances using tacheometry surveying.

Set out different types of curves

UNIT I CHAIN AND COMPASS SURVEYING 9

Surveying- Introduction and principles - Classification – maps - scales - Conventional signs - Survey instruments

-handling and adjustments - Chain surveying-ranging and chaining - reciprocal ranging - setting perpendiculars -

well conditioned triangles –obstacles- sources and limits of error and their correction - Compass-types-bearings-

magnetic and true north, magnetic declination and its variation – traversing- local attraction and its elimination.

UNIT II LEVELLING AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Levelling- principles- levels and staves- accessories- temporary and permanent adjustments- sensitiveness of

bubble tube - Bench marks – Types of levelling – booking- reduced levels- determination - plotting LS and CS-

curvature and refraction corrections-contour-types-applications.

UNIT III THEODOLITE SURVEYING 9

Theodolite - vernier and micro-optic - description and uses - temporary and permanent adjustments - horizontal -

vertical angles - heights and distances - traversing - closing error and distribution - Gale’s table - omitted

measurements.

UNIT IV TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING 9

Tacheometry -principle- systems- tangential- stadia methods - horizontal and inclined sights – staff- vertical and

normal - fixed and movable hairs - stadia constants – anallatic lens - subtense bar.

62

UNIT V CURVES 9

Introduction- curve ranging - horizontal and vertical curves - Simple curves - setting with chain and tapes,

tangential angles by theodolite, double theodolite – Compound curves -Reverse curves- Transition curves -

functions and requirements - setting out by offsets and angles - vertical curves - sight distances.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kanetkar T.P., “Surveying and Levelling”, Vols. I and II, Standard Publishers, New Delhi 2008.

2. Duggal R.K, “Surveying”, Vol. I & II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bannister A and Raymond S, “Surveying”, Addison Wesley Longman ltd, England, 2006.

2. Anderson, J.M. and Mikhail, E.M., “Surveying: Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill, 1998.

3. Schofield, W. and Breach M., “Engineering Surveying”, 6th Ed., Butterworth-Heineman,2007

4. Arora, K.R., “Surveying”, Vol. I, II and III, Standard Book House, 1995.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107122

15CE305 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the concepts of geological agents and their processes.

To provide knowledge on various properties of minerals and their engineering significance.

To give knowledge on various classifications of rocks.

To understand the importance of geological investigations and mapping.

To understand the applications of geological surveys in civil engineering structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Identify various geological agents and processes involved.

Identify the available minerals by their properties and behaviour.

Classify and identify the available rocks in the construction site.

Do geological investigations and mapping for construction projects.

Apply the geological concepts in civil engineering projects.

UNIT I GENERAL GEOLOGY 9

Role of Geology in Civil engineering – Branches of geology – Earth structures and composition –Elementary

knowledge on continental drift and plate tectonics - Earth processes –Weathering – Geological work of rivers,

wind and sea - Engineering importance – Earthquake belts in India – Ground water – Mode of occurrence –

Prospecting .

63

UNIT II MINERALOGY 9

Introduction – Crystallography – elements, symmetry, axes, forms, systems – Mineral properties – Physical,

optical – Study of rock forming minerals - Felspar group - Orthoclase, microcline, albite, anorthite – Pyroxene

group - Enstatite, augite - Oxide minerals - Quartz, corundum - Carbonate minerals – Calcite, dolomite,

magnesite – Minerals usage in civil engineering field - Coal and petroleum – Origin and occurrence in India.

UNIT III PETROLOGY 9

Classification of rocks – Distinction between igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks- Occurrence,

Engineering properties and distribution - Igneous rocks– Granite, syenite, diorite, gabbro, pegmatite, dolerite and

basalt- sedimentary rocks - Sandstone, limestone, shale, conglomerate and breccia-Metamorphic rocks-

Quartzite, marble, slate, phyllite, gneiss and schist.

UNIT IV STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND MAPPING 9

Introduction – Basic terminologies – Study of structural features – Folds, faults and joints -Engineering

considerations - Geophysical investigations- Seismic and electrical-Mapping-Introduction-Types-Geological-

Structural-Lithological.

UNIT V GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING 9

Geological conditions necessary for construction of dams, tunnels, buildings, road cuttings- Landslides – Causes

and preventions- Improvement of sites-Coastal protection.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Parbin Singh, “Engineering and General Geology”, S.K.Kataria& Sons, 2012.

2. S.K.Duggal, H.K.Pandey and N.Rawal, “Engineering geology”, McGraw Hill Education Private limited,2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.,Varghese P. C, “Engineering Geology for Civil Engineers”, PHI Learning Private Limited, Delhi, 2015.

2. F.G.H. Blyth and M.H.de Freitas, “Geology for Engineers”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2015.

15CE351 SURVEY PRACTICAL - I

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To impart knowledge on measuring area and offset by using chain surveying.

To familiarize concepts of bearing and included angles using different compass.

To provide knowledge on different methods of plane table surveying.

To acquire knowledge on finding the reduced levels using different methods of levelling.

To impart knowledge on LS and CS

To provide knowledge on different types of contours

Course Outcomes:


Handle the conventional surveying instruments such as chain/tape, compass and plane table and in the

64

field of civil engineering.

Undergo traverse using various instruments.

Determine reduced levels of various points.

Plot LS, CS and Contour using levelling instrument.

Use the theodolite effectively for various applications.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Measurement of given area using chain and cross staff survey.

2. Measurement of area of the given building using chain and its accessories.

3. Measurement of bearings and calculation of included angles using Prismatic and Surveyors Compass.

4. Adjustment of compass traverse

5. Area calculation by Radiation and Intersection methods using plane table.

6. Location of points by Resection method -Three point problem.

7. Determination of Reduced levels of various locations-Simple levelling.

8. Determination of Reduced levels- Fly and check Levelling.

9. Plotting of LS and CS.

10. Plotting of Contours.

11. Study of Theodolite.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kanetkar T.P., “Surveying and Levelling”, Vols. I and II, Standard Publishers, New Delhi 2008

2. Arora, K.R., “Surveying”, Vol. I, II and III, Standard Book House, 1995


15CE352 SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To give exposure on classification of soil based on index properties.

To educate the fundamentals of OMC and maximum dry density of soil mass.

To provide knowledge on the shear strength of the given soil.

To study about the compressibility of soil sample.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the students will be able to:

Classify the soil sample based on its index properties.

Assess the OMC required in the field applications.

Check stability of slopes by performing shear strength test on soil.

Estimate compressibility of soil and apply it on the field.

65

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Collection of soil sample using Split spoon sampler

2. DETERMINATION OF INDEX PROPERTIES

a. Special gravity of soil solids

b. Grain size distribution – Sieve analysis and Hydrometer analysis

c. Liquid limit, Plastic limit and shrinkage limit tests

3. DETERMINATION OF INSITU DENSITY AND COMPACTION CHARACTERISTICS

a. Field density Test (Core cutter and Sand replacement method)

b. Moisture – density relationship using Standard Proctor Compaction test

4. DETERMINATION OF ENGINEERING PROPERTIES

a. Permeability (constant head and falling head methods)

b. One dimensional consolidation test on cohesive soil

c. Direct shear test in cohesionless soil

d. Unconfined compression test in cohesive soil

e. California Bearing Ratio Test on Road materials

f. Tri-axial compression test in cohesion-less soil to estimate shear strength parameters

g. Laboratory vane Shear test in cohesive soil

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. GopalRanjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International Publishers,

New Delhi, 2000.

2. Saibaba Reddy, E. Ramasastri, K. “Measurement of Engineering Properties of Soils”, New age

International (P) Limited Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~madhav/geolab.html

2. http://www.uic.edu/classes/cemm/cemmlab/

15HS351 PRESENTATION SKILLS LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To hone the students’ proficiency in speaking skills

To enhance their pronouncing skills

To help the students acquire presentation skills

To enable the students communicate effectively

Course Outcomes:

Students of Engineering and Technology will be able to

recognize phonemes

improve pronunciation

acquire all strategies of presentation skills

develop interpersonal skills

Phonetic Practice 4

English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress, phoneme recognizing practice

http://home.iitk.ac.in/~madhav/geolab.html

http://www.uic.edu/classes/cemm/cemmlab/

66

Listening Comprehension 3

Documentaries, Educational video clips, Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news, Listening to conversations,

Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.

Language Functions 3

Giving reasons, talking about future plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making suggestions

Presentation Strategies 5

Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale; Organizing Contents; Preparing Outline; Audio-

visual Aids; Nuances of Delivery; Body Language; Proximics; Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics; Time-

Dimension.

Presentation and Appraisal Sessions 10

Importance of Journal articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,

discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references), Preparation of scholarly papers based on the

internet Resources, Oral Presentations & Reviews.

TOTAL: 30 Periods

Reference Books

1. Mandel, Steve. Effective Presentation Skills. New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.

2. Gopalaswamy, Ramesh & Ramesh Mahadevan. ACE of Soft Skills. New Delhi: Pearson, 2010.

3. Gimson, AC. An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: ELBS, 1989.

4. Oconnor, JD. Better English Pronunciation. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press, 1967.

67

IV SEMESTER

15MA401 MATHEMATICS IV - NUMERICAL METHODS

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide the mathematical foundations of numerical techniques for solving linear system, eigenvalue

problems, interpolation, numerical differentiation and integration and the errors associated with them;

To demonstrate the utility of numerical techniques of ordinary and partial differential equations in solving

engineering problems where analytical solutions are not readily available.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course students will be

Able to solve the eigenvector problems

Able to solve the numerical differentiation and interpolation and the errors associated with them.

Able to solve the engineering problems associated with the ordinary and partial differential equations.

UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton-Raphson method-

Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss Elimination method –Pivoting - Iterative method - Gauss-Seidel–

Dominant eigenvalue of a matrix by Power method.

UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 9+3

Lagrange interpolation – Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation –Newton’s divided difference

interpolation – Cubic Splines.

UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTATION AND INTEGRATION 9+3

Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using Trapezoidal,

Simpson’s 1/3 and Simpson’s 3/8 rules - Two point andthree point Gaussian quadrature formulae – Evaluation of

double integrals by Trapezoidal andSimpson’s rules.

UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Single step- Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method -Fourth order Runge-Kutta method for solving first and

second order equations - Multi-step methods - Milne’s and Adams-Bash forth predictor-corrector methods –

methods for solving first order equation.

UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIALDIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS

9+3

Finite difference methods for solving two-point linear boundary value problems. Finite difference techniques for

the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations on rectangular domain – One dimensional

heat-flow equation by explicit and implicit methods - One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.


68

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, Khanna Publishers, New

Delhi, 9th

Edition, 2007.

2. Sankara R.K., “Numerical methods for Scientists and Engineers’, Prentice Hall ofIndia Private Ltd., New

Delhi, 3rd

Edition,2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Brian B., “A Friendly Introduction to Numerical Analysis”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2007.

2. Gerald, C.F.,Wheatley, P.O.,“Applied Numerical Analysis”,Pearson Education Asia,New Delhi,7th

Edition, 2011.

3. Laurene V. Fausett, “Applied Numerical Analysis using MATLAB”, Pearson Education,New Delhi, 1st print, 2

nd

Edition, 2009

15CE401 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To build the necessary theoretical background for analysis of trusses.

To have an exposure on the analysis of thin and thick cylinders subjected to fluid pressure and various failure

theories.

To understand the behaviour of short and long column under axial and eccentric loads.

To provide understanding of various methods in finding deflection of beams.

To give exposure to unsymmetrical bending and shear.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyse the determinate trusses.

Analyze the problems related to thin and thick cylinders subjected to fluid pressure.

Familiarize with the behaviour of short and long column under axial and eccentric loads.

Determine slope and deflection in beams using various methods.

Apply the concepts in beams subjected to unsymmetrical bending.

UNIT I ANALYSIS OF TRUSSES 9+3

Perfect, deficient and redundant trusses - Degree of redundancy – Internal and external redundancy – Methods

of analysis - Method of joints - Method of section- Method of tension coefficient- Analysis of Space Truss

UNIT II THIN AND THICK CYLINDERS AND THEORIES OF ELASTIC FAILURE 9+3

Thin cylinders – Circumferential stress – Longitudinal stress – Volumetric strain - Stresses in thick cylindrical shell

– Lame’s equation – Stresses in compound cylinders – Shrink fit - Failure theories - Maximum principal stress

theory- Maximum shear stress theory- Maximum principal strain theory- Strain energy theory- maximum shear

strain energy theory

UNIT III COLUMNS AND STRUTS 9+3

Short and slender columns- Axial and bending stress – Kern of a section - buckling and stability – Columns with

pinned ends - Columns with other support conditions - Columns with eccentric loads - Euler theory and Rankine’s

formula - Elastic and inelastic column behaviour – Design formulae for columns.

69

UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9+3

Deflection of beams - Geometric methods - Double integration method – Macaulay’s method – Moment-Area

method - Conjugate beam method.

UNIT V UNSYMMETRICAL BENDING 9+3

Unsymmetrical bending- Symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections - Bending stresses in beams - Shear centre -

Shear centre for thin walled beam of mono- Symmetric and unsymmetrical open sections.


TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rajput R.K. "Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Solids)", S.Chand& company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

2. Egor P Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, 2nd edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003

2. PunmiaB.C."Theory of Structures" (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 2004.

3. Rattan.S.S., "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

4. Srinath, L.S, “Advanced mechanics and solids”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing company ltd, 2005.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. William A .Nash, “Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum‟ s Outline Series, Tata McGraw

Hill Publishing company, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.esm.psu.edu/courses/emch213d/tutorials/animations

15CE402 MECHANICS OF FLUIDS AND MACHINERY

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To get exposed to basic properties of fluids

To acquire knowledge on basic concepts of fluid mechanics

To be familiar with various major & minor losses encountered in pipe flow

To understand various types of open channel flows

To impart basic theory of various types of turbines & pumps

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Measure the pressure of fluid and determine the stability of floating bodies

Measure the discharge of fluid flowing through pipes

Compute the major and minor losses occurring in pipe flow

Design a most economical channel section

Select appropriate turbine and pump based on the requirement

70

UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS 9+3

Scope of fluid mechanics - Definitions of a fluid - Methods of analysis - Dimensions and units -Viscosity, density,

vapour pressure ,surface tension, capillarity - Basic equation of fluid statics - Pressure measurements -

Manometers. - Buoyancy and floatation - Stability of floating bodies - Relative equilibrium.

UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS & DYNAMICS 9+3

Kinematics – Methods of describing fluid motion - Classification of flows and flow lines- - Stream function and

velocity potentials - Flow nets.

Dynamics - Application of control volume to continuity, energy and momentum - Euler’s equation of motion along

a stream line - Bernoulli’s equation - Applications to velocity and discharge measurements - Linear momentum

equation.

UNIT III FLOW THROUGH PIPES 9+3

Laminar flow through pipes - Development of laminar and turbulent flows in pipes - Reynolds experiment -

Hagen Poiseullie equation – Darcy - Weisbach equation - Moody diagram - Major and minor losses of flow in

pipes - Pipes in series and in parallel – Equivalent pipes – Power transmission through pipes.

UNIT IV FLOW THROUGH OPEN CHANNELS 9+3

Definition and differences between pipe flow and open channel flow –Types open channels - Types of Flow –

Properties of open channel - Fundamental equations - Velocity distribution in open channel – Steady uniform

flow: Chezy equation, Manning equation - Best hydraulic sections for uniform flow - Computation in Uniform Flow

- Specific energy and specific force.

UNIT V TURBINES & PUMPS 9+3

Turbines - Classification - Reaction turbines - Francis turbine, Radial flow turbines, draft tube and cavitation -

Propeller and Kaplan turbines - Impulse turbine - Performance of turbine - Specific speed - Runaway speed -

Similarity laws.

Centrifugal pumps - Minimum speed to start the pump - NPSH - Cavitation in pumps - Operating characteristics -

Multistage pumps – jet pump and submersible pumps (working principle only).


TEXT BOOKS:

1. VenTe Chow, “Open Channel Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.

2. Subramanya. K , “1000 solved problems in Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines” Tata McGraw –

Hill Publishing company Limited, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Modi P.N and Seth, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”, Standard Book House

New Delhi. 2003

2. Jain A. K.” Fluid Mechanics”, Khanna Publishers 1995.

3. Rajesh Srivastava,” Flow through open channels”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Streeter, V.L. Wylie, E. B. and Bedford K.W, “Fluid Mechanics”, 9th

edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

1998.

71

15CE403 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To get basic knowledge of the geotechnical site investigation.

To understand the types of foundation and design principles

To discuss different types of pile foundation and its capacity

To study various earth pressure theories

To gain knowledge on special types of foundation

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Conduct sub surface investigation and select foundation based on soil condition

Estimate pressure distribution below the footing and calculate bearing capacity of soil

Calculate the load carrying capacity of piles.

Check the stability of retaining wall

Choose the suitable foundations.

UNIT I SITE INVESTIGATION 9

Introduction – Sub surface exploration – stages, depth, lateral extent and methods – Standard penetration test -

significance - sampling – types, techniques and requirements- Bore log report.

UNIT II SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9

Introduction – Location and depth of foundation – Bearing capacity of shallow foundation – influencing factors –

Terzaghi’s theory and BIS method – In-situ tests – Plate load test - allowable bearing pressure - Settlement –

components of settlement – determination of settlement of foundations on granular and clay deposits – allowable

settlements – Methods of minimizing settlement and differential settlement.

UNIT III PILE FOUNDATION 9

Introduction – types – selection of piles – Pile carrying capacity in granular and cohesive soil – Static and

dynamic formula– Capacity from insitu tests (SPT and SCPT) – Negative skin friction – Uplift capacity – Group

capacity– Pile load test - Settlement of pile groups – Interpretation – Construction procedure of under reamed

piles.

UNIT IV RETAINING WALLS 9

Introduction – Types of retaining wall - Plastic equilibrium in soils – Active and passive states – Rankine’s theory

– Coulombs wedge theory – Earth pressure on retaining walls of simple configurations – Graphical methods –

Rebhann and Culmann methods- pressure on the wall due to line load – stability analysis.

UNIT V SPECIAL FOUNDATIONS 9

Introduction – Foundations of transmission line towers – data requirements – forces - choice of foundation type -

design procedure only - Well foundation - Tilt and shift - Remedial measures- Bearing capacity - methods of

construction - settlement - lateral stability – Recent scenario.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

72

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and applied soil mechanics”, New Age International Publishers,

New Delhi, 2000.

2. Murthy, V.N.S., “Text Book of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Purushothama Raj. P., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,

2013.

2. C. Venkataramaiah, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.

3. Arora K.R., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers and Distributors, New

Delhi, 2005.

4. Punmia B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 16th Edition,

(2005).

5. Varghese P.C.,”Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. N.N. Som and S.C. Das, “Theory and Practice of Foundation Design”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Civil%20Engineering/Foundation_Engineering/TOC-M1.htm

2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/06CV64.html

15CE404 HIGHWAYS AND RAILWAYS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals related to the Planning and design of road components.

To provide knowledge on various materials of pavement construction and method of design of highway

construction.

To provide exposure on various types of road construction procedures and maintenance methods.

To impart knowledge on various planning standards related to railway components.

To provide hands on experience on railway components, its geometrics and design of elements.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the concepts behind the Highway component planning.

Apply the knowledge on the materials characteristics in the design of road pavements.

Analyse the concepts of road construction procedures and apply it in maintenance methods.

Apply the concepts of railway planning while designing the permanent way.

Design the components or railways such as level crossings and turnouts.

73

UNIT I HIGHWAY PLANNING AND DESIGN 9

History of road development in India-Classification of roads-present status- road patterns, alignment: basic

requirements –influencing factors-location surveys- alignment in hilly areas. Geometric design-terrain

classification-design speed-vehicular characteristics- cross-section elements-road user characteristics. Sight

distance: PIEV theory, SSD, OSD and ISD. Design of horizontal curves, super elevation, radius and widening of

pavements at curves-transition curves. Types of gradients-grade compensation on curves-analysis of vertical

curves- summit curves-valley curves.

UNIT II PAVEMENT MATERIALS AND PAVEMENT DESIGN 9

Aggregates-Desirable properties-Tests-Requirements for different types of pavements. Bituminous Materials-

Tests and Desirable properties-Selection of Bitumen Grade. Bituminous Mix Design-Principle and Methods.

Different Pavement Types-Functions of Components-Design factors- Design Wheel Load- ESWL- Repetition of

loads-Materials characteristics- Climatic variation. Design of flexible and rigid pavements (IRC approach)-

Stresses in rigid highway pavements- Critical load positions-stresses due to loads, temperature change,

combined stresses, Joints in rigid pavements: transverse joints- longitudinal joints-fillers and sealers

UNIT III HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE 9

Equipment used for construction-Types of road constructions: WBM-Bituminous roads- cement concrete road -

soil stabilized roads: methods, use of geo-textiles. Highway drainage- maintenance & rehabilitation- failures of

flexible and rigid pavements, maintenance procedures: assessment and need - pavement management

system- evaluation of pavements.

UNIT IV RAILWAY PLANNING 9

Introduction- type of modes-role of rail transportation in Economic development - Merits of rail transportation,

gauges - permanent way - track components: Sleepers-functions ,types, sleeper density- ballast- functions -

Types of materials. Rails-Coning of wheels and tilting of rails- rail cross sections- wear and creep of

rails- rail fastenings. Geometric design- Gradients- transition curves- widening of gauges on curves- cant and

cant deficiency.

UNIT V RAILWAY GEOMETRIC DESIGN AND MAINTENANCE 9

Point and crossing-design of turnouts - track junctions. Yards: types and functions. Signaling and interlocking-

classification - interlocking of signals and points-control of train movements. Construction and

maintenance of railway track- methods of construction, -material requirements- special measures for high

speed track- maintenance of tracks and traffic operations – Recent trends.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. L R Kadiyali, N B Lal,“ Principles and practice of highway engineering”, Khanna Publications, 2005.

2. Saxena S.C. and Arora S. P., “A Course of Railway Engineering”,DhanpatRai, New Delhi, 7th edition,2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Agarwal, M. M.,“Indian Railway Track”, Sachdeva Press, New Delhi,2013.

2. Mundrey.J.S., “Railway Track Engineering”Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009

3. Hay W.W., “Introduction to transportation Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 2012.

4. Daniel J Findley, Bastian Schroeder, Christopher Cunningham & Tom Brown, “Highway Engineering:

Planning, Design, and Operations”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2015.

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22J.+S.+Mundrey%22

http://www.amazon.com/Daniel-J-Findley/e/B018SNKFBY/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&text=Bastian+Schroeder&search-alias=books&field-author=Bastian+Schroeder&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_3?ie=UTF8&text=Christopher+Cunningham&search-alias=books&field-author=Christopher+Cunningham&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_4?ie=UTF8&text=Tom+Brown&search-alias=books&field-author=Tom+Brown&sort=relevancerank

74

15CE405 IRRIGATION ENGINEERING AND HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To get exposure to basic principles of Irrigation

To emphasis the need and importance of Irrigation

To provide training on design of impounding structures

To be familiar with design of hydraulic structures

To realize the importance of participatory irrigation management

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Measure the Soil moisture characteristics

Prepare the irrigation schedule and estimate design flood

Design various types of dams

Design various types of canals

Assess the performance of an irrigation system

UNIT I IRRIGATION PRINCIPLES 9

Need for irrigation – Advantages and ill effects – Development of irrigation –– Tamilnadu scenario - Physical

properties of soil -Soil moisture characteristics – Retention of water in soils and concept of plant available water –

Movement of water into and within the soils – Duty, Delta, Base Period– Factors affecting Duty-Irrigation

efficiencies–Consumptive use of water-Irrigation requirements of crops - Standards for irrigation water.

UNIT II HYDROLOGY & DESIGN FLOOD ESTIMATION 9

Importance of hydrology – Hydrological cycle – Types of precipitation – Measurement of rainfall by rain gauges –

Mean rainfall over a drainage basin – Various methods of computing runoff from its given rainfall – Design flood -

Estimating design flood and flood flows

UNIT III DIVERSION AND IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 9

Head works –Weirs and Barrage –Types of impounding structures - Factors affecting, location of dams -Forces

on a dam -Design of Gravity dams- Earth dams, Arch dams – Spillways -Energy dissipaters.

UNIT IV CANAL IRRIGATION 9

Classification of canals- Alignment of canals – Design of irrigation canals– Regime theories - Canal Head works

– Canal regulators - Canal drops – Cross drainage works – Canal Outlet, Escapes –Lining and maintenance of

canals – Other methods of Irrigation – Surface and Subsurface methods – Merits and Demerits

UNIT V IRRIGATION WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Modernization techniques – Rehabilitation – Command Area Development - Systems of rice intensification -

Water delivery systems - Participatory Irrigation Management - Farmer’s organization and turn over – Water

users associations - Economic aspects of irrigation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

75

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sharma, R.K., and Sharma, T.K., “Irrigation Engineering”, S. Chand and Company, NewDelhi, 2008.

2. Garg, S.K., “Irrigation Engineering,” Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Arora, K.R., “Irrigation, Water Power and Water Resources Engineering”, StandardPublishers Distributors,

New Delhi, 2009.

2. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, “Irrigation Water Management”, Prentice-Hall of India, NewDelhi, 2008.

3. Punmia, B.C., “Irrigation and Water Power Engineering”, Laxmi Publishers, New Delhi,2008

4. Asawa, G.L., “Irrigation Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,2009

15CE451 SURVEY PRACTICAL - II

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To apply geometric and trigonometric principles of surveying.

To get practical exposure to different systems of Tacheometry.

To set out a curve by different methods.

To determine the azimuth of a line by observation of sun.

To give exposure on modern surveying instruments like GPS and Total station.

Course Outcomes:


Determine the heights, distances, and gradient using trigonometric methods

Calculate the height of an inaccessible point by system of tacheometry.

Apply field procedures in setting out of a curve.

Calculate the azimuth of a line by observation of sun.

Use modern surveying instruments like total station, GPS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Measurement of Horizontal and Vertical angle using theodolite

2. Measurement of heights and distances by single plane and double plane method.

3. Measurement of heights and distances using stadia and tangential system of Tacheometry.

4. Setting out of foundation for a given building.

5. Setting out of a Simple curve using linear method.

6. Setting out of a Simple curve using Angular method.

7. Setting out of a compound curve

8. Calculation of Latitude and Longitude using GPS.

9. Determination of angles and height measurement using total station

10. Determination of area of a given plot using total station

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

76

REFERENCE BOOKS:


2. Arora, K.R., “Surveying”, Vol. I, II and III, Standard Book House, 1995


15CE452 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To understand the technical concepts and ways to solve engineering problems through theoretical

calculations by conducting experiments.

To learn the principles studied in theory.

To access the strength of various construction materials.

To understand the concepts of mechanics of materials to determine the behaviour of materials under

load.

To provide the skill sets required in performing experiments and writing lab reports.

Course Outcomes:


Apply the concepts of mechanics for determining stresses and strains from the member forces.

Verify the principle and theory studied using the experiments.

Do problems by knowing the effects of axial loads, bending, shear and torsion on structural components.

Determine the behavior of structural elements such as bars, beams and columns subjected to tension,

compression, shear, bending and torsion by means of experiments.

Understand the behavior of materials and structural elements.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Hardness of the specimen using Vickers, Brinelland Rockwell Hardness machine.

2. Impact strength of the specimen by izod and charpy method.

3. Young’s Modulus of the specimen using deflection test.

4. Proving Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem using deflection test.

5. Stiffness and Modulus of rigidity of the specimen using Torsion testing machine.

6. Modulus of rigidity and stiffness of the spring specimen by Compression and tension test.

7. Yield strength, Ultimate strength, percentage of elongation and Young’s modulus for the Mild steel rod

and HYSD bars using UTM.

8. Maximum shear strength of the Mild steel and Aluminium bar using double shear test.

9. Modulus of rigidity of the specimen using wire Torsion testing machine and stiffness using rod torsion

testing machine.

10. Bending test using UTM.

11. Tensile strength of the thin wire using tensile tester apparatus.

12. Young’s Modulus Of Concrete Using UTM

77

Tests on Cement

1. Specific Gravity

2. Fineness of a sample by Sieving

3. Standard Consistency and Setting Time

4. Soundness

5. Compressive Strength

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Standard Codes:

1. ASTM Standards

2. Indian Standards

(i). IS 516-1959-Indian Standard methods of Tests for strength of Concrete

(ii).IS 5242-1979-Indian Standard method of test for determining shear strength of metals

(iii).IS 1734(part 10)-1983- Indian Standard method of test for ply wood

(iv).IS 1598-1977- Indian Standard method of test for izod impact test of metals

(v). IS 1757-1988- Indian Standard method of test for charpy impact (V-Notch) on Metallic Material

(vi).IS 1501-2002- Indian Standard method for vickers hardness test for metallic materials

(vii).IS 1500-2005- Indian Standard method for brinell hardness test for metallic materials

(ix).IS 1586-2000- Indian Standard method for rockwell hardness test for metallic materials

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003

2. PunmiaB.C."Theory of Structures" (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 2004.

3. Rattan.S.S., "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

4. Srinath, L.S, “Advanced mechanics and solids”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing company ltd, 2005.

15CE453 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To impart knowledge on measuring flow through pipes and open channels

To familiarize the determination of major and minor losses in pipes

To get exposed to basic concept of stability of floating bodies

To acquire knowledge on finding the efficiency of various types of pumps

To provide knowledge on various types of turbines and their applications

Course Outcomes:


Measure the flow through pipes and open channels

Compute the major and minor energy losses in pipes

78

Determine the meta centric height of floating bodies

Determine the efficiency of various types of pumps

Select appropriate type of turbine for the given cituation

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Calibration of orifice for flow measurement in tanks

2. Flow measurement in Open channel using various types of Notches

3. Determination of co-efficient of discharge of venture meter for flow measurement in pipes

4. Calibration of orifice meter to measure the flow of liquid through pipes

5. Study of impact of jet on flat plate (normal / inclined)

6. Computation of friction factor for the given pipe to calculate the head loss in pipe networks

7. Determination of various minor losses in pipes to compute the total head loss

8. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem to apply in flow measuring devices

9. Determination of efficiency of the Francis turbine used for hydropower generation

10. Determination of meta centric height of floating body to assess the stability condition

11. Study on performance characteristics of Centrifugal pumps (Constant speed / variable speed)

12. Determination of efficiency of the reciprocating pump to decide its suitability for specific purpose.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. VenTe Chow, “Open Channel Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.

2. Modi P.N and Seth, “ Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”, Standard Book House

New Delhi. 2003

3. Jain A. K.” Fluid Mechanics”. Khanna Publishers 1995.

79

V Semester

15CE501 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – I

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on computing slopes and deflections using energy methods.

Have knowledge on influence lines for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.

To analyse and solve arched and cable profiled structures.

To analyse the indeterminate structures for internal forces by theorem of three moments and slope

deflection method.

To analyse the indeterminate structures for internal forces Moment distribution method.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Determine slopes and deflections of beams and frames.

Draw influence lines for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.

Analyse and solve arched and cable profiled structures.

Analyse the indeterminate structures by exact analysis.

Analyse the indeterminate structures by iterative procedure.

UNIT I WORK–ENERGY METHODS AND INDETERMINATE TRUSSES 9+3

Work - Principle of virtual work - Deflections of trusses, beams and frames - Conservation of energy and strain

energy – Castigliano’s second theorem - Betti’s law and Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem. Analysis of indeterminate

trusses by strain energy method– Lack of fit –Temperature stresses (up to two degrees of redundancy).

UNIT II MOVING LOADS AND INFLUENCE LINES 9+3

Influence lines for reactions in statically determinate structures – influence lines for member forces in pin-jointed

frames – Influence lines for shear force and bending moment in beam sections – Calculation of critical stress

resultants due to concentrated and distributed moving loads - EUDL – Combined Dead and Moving Load

Diagram- Focal Length - Muller Breslau‟s principle – Influence lines for continuous beams and single storey rigid

frames – Indirect model analysis for influence lines of indeterminate structures – Beggsdeformeter

UNIT III ARCHES 9+3

Arches as structural forms – Examples of arch structures – Types of arches – Analysis of three hinged, two

hinged and fixed arches, parabolic and circular arches – Settlement and temperature effects.

UNIT IV INDETERMINATE BEAMS AND FRAMES 9+3

Theorem of three - Moments equation - Fixed and propped cantilever - Derivation of slope deflection equation -

Analysis of statically indeterminate beams and portal frames – Continuous beams with and without support

yielding – Analysis of portal frames with and without sway.

UNIT V MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 9+3

Distribution and carryover of moments – Stiffness and carry over factors – Analysis of continuous beams – Plane

rigid frames with and without sway – Neylor‟s simplification.


80

TEXTBOOKS:

1. L.S. Negi& R.S. Jangid, “Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 6th Edition,

2003.

2. Punmia.B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, "Theory of structures", Laxmi Publications Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2004 .

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Wang C.K. , “Indeterminate Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010

2. Ghali.A., Nebille and Brown. T.G., "Structural Analysis - A unified classical and matrix approach" Sixth

Edition, SPON press, New York, 2013.

3. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics and Analysis", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2011.

4. Reddy. C.S., "Basic Structural Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

5. BhavaiKatti, S.S, "Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 & Vol. 2", Vikas Publishing Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.

6. Vaidyanadhan, R and Perumal, P, “Comprehensive Structural Analysis – Vol.1 & Vol.2”, Laxmi

Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Devdas Menon “Structural Analysis”, Narosha publishing house, New Delhi, 2008

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.ce.memphis.edu/3121/notes/notes.html

2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/CV42.html

15CE502 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop an understanding on the basic concepts in the behavior and design of reinforced concrete

systems and elements using limit state method.

To introduce the design principles of RC members for shear, bond, and torsion.

To introduce the concepts in the design of RC Column design.

To give the knowledge in the concept of RC footings.

To develop an understanding on the basic concepts in the behavior and design of staircase.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Design flexural members using limit state method under different loading and end conditions.

Design flexural members of any cross sectional shape for shear, bond, and torsion.

Design RC columns of any cross section with different end conditions.

Select and design RC footing of different cross section under various site conditions.

Choose and design various types of staircase as per the site/building requirements.

81

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS 9

Stages in Structural Design – Design philosophies – Introduction to working stress method, ultimate load design

(Principles only) - Limit state method – Comparison – General principles of design – Design of beams and slabs

–Procedure for the analysis of section by strain compatibility method.

UNIT II DESIGN FOR BOND, ANCHORAGE, SHEAR & TORSION 9

Design of flanged beams - Behavior of RC members in bond and Anchorage – Curtailment of reinforcement -

Behavior of RC beams in shear and torsion - Design of RC members for combined bending, shear and torsion.

UNIT III DESIGN OF COLUMNS 9

Columns – Assumptions – Effective length – Classification – Design guidelines – Axially loaded short columns

with lateral ties and helical reinforcement – Columns - uni-axial bending – biaxial bending – Slender columns

subjected to biaxial bending - Standard method of detailing of RC columns.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF FOOTING 9

Foundations - Classification - Design guidelines - Codal provisions -Design of wall footing– Design of axially and

eccentrically loaded square, rectangular and circular footing – Design of combined footing - Standard method of

detailing of RC footing.

UNIT V DESIGN OF STAIRCASE 9

Types of stairs – Design of ordinary stairs, doglegged stairs, Open newel stairs and stairs with stringer beams -

Standard method of detailing of staircase.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. UnnikrishnaPillai, S., DevdasMenon, “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Ltd., New Delhi 2009.

2. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010.

2. Krishna Raju, N., “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi,

2003.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105105

CODE BOOKS:

1. IS 456 – 2000 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete – CODE OF PRACTICE (Fourth Revision)

2. SP 16 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS 456:1978.

82

15CE503 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the properties of different cements and the concretes

To provide knowledge on different mix design methods

To give exposure on different kinds of admixtures.

To familiarize the concepts on destructive and non-destructive tests.

To get exposure on special concretes and concreting methods.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Evaluate the properties of cement and concrete.

Design different types of concrete mix.

Employ a suitable admixture in the required field conditions.

Diagnose the strength and durability of concrete structures with different testing methods.

Choose suitable environmental friendly materials for making sustainable green concrete.

UNIT I CONCRETE 9

Fresh concrete - Constituent materials – Cement – Manufacturing and chemical composition - Types and grades

- Mechanism of hydration - Properties and tests - Aggregates - Water – Concrete manufacturing stages -

Workability - Concepts and tests; Hardened concrete - Properties and tests

UNIT II MIX DESIGN 9

Concept and principles – Influencing factors - Types and methods - Design practice of ACI, British and IS method

- Variability in test results - Sampling and acceptance criteria - Quality control - Software for mix design.

UNIT III ADMIXTURES 9

Necessity - Types - Chemical admixtures with specific properties - Accelerators - Retarders -Plasticizers and

Super plasticizers - Water proofers - Mineral admixtures - Fly ash - Slag - Micro and Nano silica - Mineral

additives and fillers

UNIT IV DESTRUCTIVE AND NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS 9

Creep of concrete - Shrinkage and thermal effects on concrete - Permeability - Air and water permeability tests &

methods - Durability of concrete - Corrosion - Remedial measures - Destructive tests - NDT - Rebound Hammer -

UPV - Corrosions Cell test

UNIT V SPECIAL CONCRETES AND CONCRETING METHODS 9

Light weight concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete - Polymer concrete - Ferro-cement - Ready mix concrete- Self

compacting concrete - High strength concrete - High performance concrete - Roller compacted concrete - Bio and

bacterial concrete - Smart concrete - Extreme weather concreting - Vacuum dewatering concreting - Underwater

concreting - Guniting and shotcreting

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

83

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Nevile, A.M., “Properties of Concrete”, Longman Publishers, 2004

2. M.S.Shetty., “Concrete Technology, Theory & Practice”, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kumar Mehta. P, Paulo. J. M. Moteiro, “Concrete – Micro Structure, Properties and Materials”, 3rd

Edition,

Mcgraw Hill, 2006

2. Gambhir, M.L., “Concrete Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004.

3. Santhakumar A.R., “Concrete Technology”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2007.

4. Indian standard plain and reinforced concrete - Code of practice, IS: 456 - 2000,(Fourth revision)

5. Indian standard concrete mix proportioning – Guide lines, IS: 10262 - 2009,(First revision)

WEB REFERENCES:


2. http://theconstructor.org/?s=concrete

15CE551 CONCRETE AND HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the properties of constituent materials, fresh concrete and mix design procedure.

To learn the tests on hardened concrete and how the different materials shall modify the performance of

concrete.

To know the properties of bitumen and their suitability.

To study the various tests carried out on aggregates

To have an exposure on field tests on bitumen mixes

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Prepare different concrete mixes and check the workability properties.

Analyze the various tests and properties of cement and concrete.

Understand quality and grade check on bitumen

Diagnose the properties of aggregates with different testing methods.

Check the quality of existing bituminous roads and constituents.

84

TESTS ON AGGREGATES

1. Bulking of Fine Aggregates

2. Specific Gravity and Water Absorption of Coarse Aggregates

3. Bulk Density and Voids of Concrete Aggregates

4. Moisture Content(or Surface Moisture) of Concrete Aggregates

5. Organic Impurities in Aggregates

6. Flakiness Index and Elongation Index

7. Crushing and impact value

8. Stripping and Abrasion

TESTS ON FRESH & HARDENED CONCRETE

1. Slump Cone and Compaction Factor

2. Flow Table and Vee Bee Consistometer

3. Compressive Strength and Split Tensile Strength

4. Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity

5. Rebound Hammer and UPV Test on Concrete

TEST ON BITUMEN

1. Penetration and Softening Point

2. Density and Specific Gravity

3. Flash and Fire Point

4. Viscosity and Ductility

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Reference Books

1. M.L.Gambhir, NehaJamwal, “Building and Construction Materials – Testing and Quality

Control(LabManual)”,McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014

2. M.S.Shetty, “Concrete Technology, Theory & Practice”, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi, 2004.

3. Khanna,S.K, Justo,C.E.G.“Highway material testing (LaboratoryManual)”, NemChand & Bros, Roorkee

(U.P), Revised Edition, 2009.

85

15CE552 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING II

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the AutoCAD workspace and user interface.

To demonstrate an understanding of advanced tools like blocks and layers etc.,

To explore the fundamental concepts and workflows for creating 3Dmodels using AutoCAD

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course students will be able to

Use the precision drafting tools to develop accurate technical drawings.

Get familiarized with advanced AutoCAD tools like layers and blocks etc.,

Create solid primitives, solid or surface models from cross-sectional geometry, or composite models

from multiple solid models.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

PART A

Planning a Project - Building layouts, landscaping, plans, elevations, sectional views etc.

Buildings with load bearing walls – Flat roofand Pitched roof

Buildings with Framed structure.

Industrial buildings – North light roof structures – Trusses

Creation of blocks and Layers

PART B

Introduction to 3D - Isometric Drawings

Wire-frame Models

Surfaces / Regions

Creation of 3D model of a simple residential building

Perspective view of one and two storey buildings

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. George Omura, Brian C. Benton, “Mastering AutoCAD 2014 and AutoCAD LT2014”, Wiley – An Autodesk

Official Press, 2013.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.mycadsite.com/tutorials/

86

15HS541 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives

To enable the students of engineering and technology attain effective professional communication skills

To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully

To make them successful corporate

To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students

Course Outcomes:

Students of Engineering and technology will be able to

attain effective communication skills

enhance business communication

acquire language proficiency

face interviews

Vocabulary Building 9

Synonyms & antonyms, grammar: error spotting exercise, listening exercise, reading comprehension exercises,

sequencing the jumbled sentences, cloze test

Business Correspondence 9

Report Writing: types of Reports- Project report – report format, Preparation of a report based on the newspaper

article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.

Group Discussion 9

Group Discussion-an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion-

Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.

Interview Skills and Soft Skills 9

Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation – self-image –

goal setting – managing changes – corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing- time management –

stress management, Career and life planning.

Theatre Art and an Introduction to International Examinations 9

Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International English

Language Testing System (IELTS) – Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge Advanced

English(CAE)– Graduate Record Examination (GRE) – Civil Service (Language related)

TOTAL: 45 Periods

Reference books

1. Berry, Thomas Elliott. Most Common Mistakes in English Usage. New Delhi: TMH Publication Company

Limited, 2012.

2. Thorpe,E and Heaton,S. Objective English. Ed: Pearson Education, II Edition,

New Delhi: 2007.

3. Bhatnagar, R.P. English for Competitive Examination. 3 ed. Macmillan, New Delhi: 2012.

4. Bhatnagar, R.P., NITINBhatnagar and Mamta. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals.

Noida: Pearson Education, 2010.

5. Rizvi, Asharaf M. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited, 2007.

87

VI Semester

15CE601 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To analyse statically indeterminate structures by imposing boundary conditions on flexibility matrix.

To formulate the element stiffness matrix and assemble the structure stiffness matrix for solving

indeterminate problems.

To understand the basics of finite element method and its application to structural analysis.

To introduce the importance of plastic analysis to calculate the collapse loads for beams and frames.

To analyse the suspension bridges and space truss.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course the students will be to

Analyse the statically indeterminate structures using flexibility method.

Analyse the statically indeterminate structures using stiffness method.

Apply the finite element method to structural analysis.

Employ plastic analysis to calculate the collapse loads for beams and frames.

Determine the member forces in suspension bridges and space truss.

UNIT I FLEXIBILITY METHOD 9+3

Equilibrium and compatibility – Determinate vs. Indeterminate structures – Indeterminacy – Primary structure –

Compatibility conditions – Analysis of indeterminate pin-jointed plane frames, continuous beams, rigid jointed

plane frames (with redundancy restricted to two).

UNIT II STIFFNESS METHOD 9+3

Element and global stiffness matrices – Analysis of continuous beams – Co-ordinate transformations – Rotation

matrix – Transformations of stiffness matrices, load vectors and displacements vectors – Analysis of pin-jointed

plane frames and rigid frames (with redundancy limited to two)

UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 9+3

Introduction – Discretization of a structure – Displacement functions – Truss element – Beam element – Plane

stress and plane strain - Triangular elements

UNIT IV PLASTIC ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES 9+3

Statically indeterminate axial problems – Beams in pure bending – Plastic moment of resistance – Plastic

modulus – Shape factor – Load factor – Plastic hinge and mechanism – Plastic analysis of indeterminate beams

and frames – Upper and lower bound theorems

UNIT V SPACE AND CABLE STRUCTURES 9+3

Analysis of Space trusses using method of tension coefficients – Beams curved in plan - Suspension cables –

suspension bridges with two and three hinged stiffening girders


88

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Punmia.B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, “Theory of Structures”, Laxmi Publications, 2004.

2. Vaidyanathan, R. and Perumal, P., “Comprehensive structural Analysis – Vol. I & II”, Laxmi Publications,

New Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ghali.A, Nebille,A.M. and Brown,T.G. “Structural Analysis” A unified classical and Matrix approach” 6th edition.

Spon Press, London and New York, 2013.

2. Coates R.C, Coutie M.G. and Kong F.K., “Structural Analysis”, ELBS and Nelson, 1990.

3. Pandit G.S. & Gupta S.P. "Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach", Tata McGraw Hill 2004.

4. William Weaver Jr. & James M. Gere, "Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures", CBS Publishers and

Distributors, Delhi, 2004.

5. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics and Analysis"., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

2011.

6. Negi L.S. &Jangid R.S., “Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2003.

7. BhavaiKatti, S.S, “Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 and Vol. 2”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

2008.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. DevdasMenon“Advanced Structural Analysis”, Narosha publishing house, New Delhi, 2008.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.ce.memphis.edu/3121/notes/notes.html

2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/CV42.html

15CE602 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To expose limit state design concepts and design of bolted and welded joints.

To provide knowledge on design tension members.

To get familiar with compression member design.

To have knowledge on design of beams.

To Gain knowledge on design of industrial structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course the students will be able to

Be proficient in limit state design concepts and connection design.

Design of tension members.

Execute compression member design

Design steel beams

Carry out Steel design real projects and live examples

89

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO STEEL STRUCTURES AND DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS 9

Steel Structures – Limit State Design Philosophy – Working Stress Design Philosophy – Review of IS:800 – 1984

and IS 800 - 2007 – Partial Safety factors – Load combinations . Design of Bolted Connections – Welded

Connections – Prying action – Eccentric connections.

UNIT II TENSION MEMBERS 9

Design of tension members – Calculation of Net Section including lag effects – Staggered Holes and Block Shear

– Design of tension splice

UNIT III COMPRESSION MEMBERS 9

Buckling Class - Flexural Buckling and Flexural –Torsional Buckling - Effective length factor - Column Formula

Design of Compression member - Strut – Stanchion – Column Splicing - Built up Columns – Lacing and

Battening

UNIT IV FLEXURAL MEMBERS 9

Classification of the section: Plastic, Compact, Semi Compact, Slender- Laterally restrained beams – laterally

Unrestrained Beams – Lateral Torsional Buckling –Effects of restraints and Effective length- Beam columns

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES AND PLATE GIRDERS 9

Elements of roof trusses – Purlins – Loads on trusses – Estimation of Wind Loads on Structures –Design of

Gantry Girder – Design of Plate Girder

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. N. Subramanian,” Design of Steel Structures: Theory and Practice”, Oxford Publications 2011.

2. Duggal, “Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.

REFERENCES:

1. S.S. Bhavikatti ,”Design of Steel Structures”, I. K. International Pvt Ltd, 2009.

2. Gaylord, E.H., Gaylord, N.C., and Stallmeyer, J.E., “Design of Steel Structures”, 3rd edition,

McGraw-Hill Publications, 1992

3. Negi L.S.” Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. INSDAG, “Teaching Resources for Structural Steel Design – Vol. I, II & III”, Kolkatta.

2. Karuna Moy Ghosh, “Analysis and Design Practice of Steel Structures” 2012

WEB REFERENCES:

1. https://engineering.purdue.edu/~ahvarma/CE%20470/

2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-engineering-Video-lectures-ltv323- Page1.html

3. http://peer.berkeley.edu/~yang/courses/ce248/CE248_LN_Floor_vibra tions.pdf

CODE BOOKS:

1. IS 800 – 2007 - Indian Standard General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice.

2. IS 800 – 1984 - Indian Standard General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice.

3. SP (6) - ISI Handbook for Structural Engineers – Structural Steel Sections (1964)

4. IS 875 – 1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other Than Earthquake) For Buildings and Structures.

a) IS 875 (Part 1) 1987 (Dead Loads - Unit Weights Of Building Materials And Stored Materials)

https://engineering.purdue.edu/~ahvarma/CE%20470/

http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-engineering-Video-lectures-ltv323-%20Page1.html

http://peer.berkeley.edu/~yang/courses/ce248/CE248_LN_Floor_vibra%20tions.pdf

90

b) IS 875 ( Part2 ) 1987 (Imposed Loads)

c) IS 875 (part – 3) 1987 ( Wind Loads )

d) IS 875 (Part – 4 )1987 (Snow Loads)

e) IS 875 (Part – 5) 1987 (Special Loads and Combinations)

15CE603 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the principles of water supply system and planning the sources, conveyance of water.

To get knowledge in treatment of water.

To impart the knowledge inprinciples behind the distribution of water and water supply to a building.

To grasp the principles of collection, conveyance and treatment of wastewater.

To know the sludge management and disposal of wastewater.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Recognize the water supply system, water sources and water quality characteristics and standards,

Intake structures, pipes and Pumps.

Select the treatment units for water.

Design the Water distribution water & Network design and House service and plumbing systems.

Appraise wastewater collection system, Pumps and various wastewater treatment units.

Analyse the concepts of wastewater disposal, House drainage and plumbing systems.

UNIT I WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS – SOURCE & CONVEYANCE 9

Planning - Objectives – Population forecasting – Design period – Water demand– Sources of water – Source

selection – Water quality parameters & significance – Standards – Intake structures – Conveyance – Pipes –

Mains design – Laying, jointing & testing of pipes – Pumps - Pump selection – Appurtenances

UNIT II WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives - Unit operations and processes - Principles, functions design and drawing of Chemical feeding, Flash

mixers, flocculators, sedimentation tanks and sand filters - Disinfection- Residue Management - Construction and

Operation & Maintenance aspects of Water Treatment Plants.

UNIT III ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9

Principles and functions of Aeration - Iron and manganese removal, Defluoridation and demineralization -Water

softening - Desalination - Membrane Systems - Recent advances.

UNIT IV WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY TO BUILDINGS 9

Requirements of water distribution -Components -Service reservoirs -Functions and drawings - Network design -

Appurtenances -operation and maintenance -Leak detection, Methods. Principles of design of water supply in

buildings -House service connection -Fixtures and fittings -Systems of plumbing and drawings of types of

plumbing.

91

UNIT V SEWERAGE SYSTEM 9

Sources of waste water – Quantity of sanitary sewage – Waste water characteristics and significance – Sewers –

Types - Laying, jointing and testing of sewers – Appurtenances.

Selection of unit operation and process – Sludge -Treatment and disposal – Digester and Biogas recovery –

Sewage farming - Sewage disposal standards- On land – Disposal into water bodies

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013

2. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1999

2. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1993

3. Hand book on Water Supply and Drainage, SP35, B.I.S., New Delhi, 1987

4. Metcalf and Eddy, M.C., “Wastewater Engineering – Treatment & Reuse”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,

New Delhi, 2003

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Punmia,B.C.,Ashok K Jain and Arun K Jain,Water Supply Engg., Laxmi Publications(P)Ltd., New Delhi, 2005

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.larsenviro.com/

15CE651 CIVIL SOFTWARE APPLICATION LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the students to develop knowledge on using software packages for analysis of structures.

To enable the students well verse with making of spread-sheets for structural design and concrete mix design.

Ability to develop network models for project management

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this lab course the students will be able to

Proficiently use the software packages for structural analysis.

Proficiently use Excel to undertake engineering calculations.

Proficiently project management software packages.

92

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

ANALYSIS USING STANDARD SOFTWARE PACKAGE

Analysis, design and detailing of Trusses.

Analysis, design and detailing of continuous Beams.

Analysis of 2D and 3D frames.

DEVELOPMENT OF PROGRAM USING SOFTWARE

Design of singly and doubly reinforced beams

Design of one way slab and two way slab

Design of columns

Design of isolated rectangular footing

Concrete mix design for M25 and M30 grade.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Planning and Scheduling for a construction project

.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Krishnamoorthy C.S., and Rajeev.S., “Computer Aided Design and Analytical tools”, Narosa., 2000.Krishna

Raju, N., “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2003.

IS CODES:

1. IS 456:2000 Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete

2. IS 875(1-5):1987 Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures.

3. SP (16): 1980 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456-1978.

4. IS 800:2007 Code of Practice for General Construction in steel.

5. SP6: Part 1:1964 Handbook for Structural Engineers.

15CE652 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the principles of sampling and preservation of water and wastewater.

To convey the principles of testing of water and wastewater.

To get the idea in testing bleaching powder and chlorinated water

To provide analyzing methods for water and wastewater.

To procure knowledge in detection of gases by using analyzers

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Acquire the sampling and preservation methods of water and wastewater.

Test the water and wastewater and their different characteristics as per standards

93

Test bleaching powder and find the disinfectant percentage in chlorinated water.

Do the different water and wastewater analysis as per standards

Detect and quantify the gases by using gas analyzers.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

A. Tests on Water and Waste water (IS 10500:2012)

Sampling and Preservation of water and wastewater samples

Physical Characteristics

1. Turbidity and Temperature

2. Odour and Colour (Demonstration only)

Chemical Characteristics

1. pH and Dissolved Oxygen

2. Dissolved and Suspended Solids

3. Volatile and Fixed Solids

4. Hardness

5. Chlorides and Sulphate

6. B.O.D. and C.O.D. test

7. Ammonia nitrogen

Biological Characteristics

1. Introduction to Bacteriological Analysis (Demonstration only)

2. Heavy Metal analysis using Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (Demonstration only)

B. Test for finding the Optimum Coagulant Dosage (Alum) for given water sample

C. Test for Bleaching Powder

1. Residual Chlorine

2. Available Chlorine

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013

2. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi, 2012

3. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1999

4. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi, 1993

5. Hand book on Water Supply and Drainage, SP35, B.I.S., New Delhi, 1987

6. Metcalf and Eddy, M.C., “Waste water Engineering–Treatment & Reuse”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,

New Delhi, 2003

94

VII Semester

15CE701 ESTIMATION AND QUANTITY SURVEYING L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the knowledge on basic concepts related to estimate preparation.

To analyse the rate of a work item according to the specification

To identify various items of work in a building & calculate their quantities using appropriate methods.

To understand the concepts behind the preparation of estimate of the various civil engineering works.

To understand the terminologies and concepts behind the valuation of properties, depreciation and time

value of money

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Prepare the estimate corresponding to the required specification

Arrive rates of various work items and get familiarized with tendering and contract process.

Calculate the quantities of various items of work in a building by entering them in a standard

measurement sheet.

Perform quantity take-offs for various work items using various methods of processing dimensions

Predict the value of properties considering various influencing factors.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ESTIMATION AND SPECIFICATION 9+3

General introduction to estimation–purpose of estimates - Types of estimates – Units of measurements for works

and materials – Degree of accuracy in measurements - Purpose and basic principles of General and Detailed

Specifications- detailed specifications for various items of work– Report accompanying the estimate.

UNIT II RATE ANALYSIS, TENDERS & CONTRACTS 9+3

Data- lead statement - Schedule of rates - Standard data book - Lump sum provision –Task/out turn of work-Rate

analysis for various work items - Tender and process of tendering – Contracts – Types of contracts – Arbitration

and legal requirements.

UNIT III BUILDING ESTIMATE 9+3

Taking out quantity – Measurement, abstract sheets and recording of measurements - Centre line method and

Long wall - short wall method – Detailed estimate of masonry buildings and R.C.C works - Preparation of Bar

Bending Schedule – Various types of arches – Calculation of brick work and RCC works in arches – Deductions

for openings - Preparation of bills of quantities Approximate estimates – Case studies.

UNIT IV ESTIMATE OF OTHER STRUCTURES 9+3

Industrial sheds- steel trusses - Water supply and sanitary works - septic tank, soak pit, manhole - Roads – earth

work, pitching of slopes, hill roads-estimation of R.C.C. slab culvert, pipe culvert- Irrigation works - canals,

aqueducts.

UNIT V VALUATION 9+3

Purpose of valuation – Types – Book value – Market value – Salvage value – Scrap value – Depreciation –

Obsolescence – Sinking fund – Land valuation – Mortgage & Lease – Problems on valuation – Annuity –

Definition & types only - Fixation of rent – Outgoing – Gross & Net income – Years’ Purchase – Capital cost –

Standard rent.

L : 45, T : 15 TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

95

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dutta .B.N, “Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering Theory and Practice,” UBS Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,

2009.

2. Patil .B.S , “Civil Engineering Contracts and Estimates”, Universities press(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Birdie .G.S, “A Text Book on Estimating and Costing”, DhanpatRai Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

2. Chakraborti .M, “Estimating ,Costing, Specification and Valuation in Civil Engineering”, M.Chakraborty

Publication,2006.

3. Banerjee.D.N. “J A Parks Principles And Practice Of Valuation”, Eastern Law House Private Ltd., New Delhi,

1998

4. Jagannathan .G, “Getting More at Less Cost“, - The Value Engineering Way, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

1995.

5. Course notes on “Estimation and costing”, State Institute of Vocational Education Andhra Pradesh,

Hyderabad. First Edition: 2006.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://drsmau.in/material.php

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati/cpm/index.html

15CE702 CONSTRUCTION PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the necessity of the planning in the diverse construction projects.

To know the appropriate techniques used for scheduling the resources.

To have exposure on various cost control methods and accounting.

To study the quality control and monitoring techniques

To make awareness among the learners about management information system.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the requirement of planning techniques exercised in the construction projects.

Choose suitable scheduling technique for the particular project.

Practice modern cost account systems and control techniques adopted.

Employ the advanced management tools for quality control and monitoring towards speedy and

guaranteed projects.

Work with MIS for large projects.

UNIT I CONSTRUCTION PLANNING 9

Necessity - Basic concepts - Phases and stages of project planning - Types of construction plans for projects -

Planning for materials, labour and equipment - Defining activities and precedence relationships - Estimating

96

activity durations and resource requirements - Program for progress of work and control - Bar and Milestone

charts - Uses and drawbacks - Terminology - Coding systems

UNIT II MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 9

Evolution of networks - Inter-relationship of events and activities - Fundamental rules for network construction -

Critical path method - Program Evaluation and Review Technique - Probability of project completion time -

Precedence networks - Scheduling for activity-on-node networks - Resource oriented scheduling - Scheduling

with resource constraints - Improving scheduling process - Time-cost relationships – Crashing and time/cost

trade-offs - Introduction to application software

UNIT III COST CONTROL & DEPARTMENTAL ACCOUNTING PROCEDURE 9

Costs and estimates associated with construction - Means of financing and assistance - Project budget - Cost

control system, cost accounts and coding - Financial accounting systems - Project cash flows - Time value of

money - Capital investment decision - Organization of PWD - Duties and responsibilities - Accounting procedure

- Administrative and technical sanction - Payment of bills - Imprest account - Temporary advance account - Cash

book - Work register - M-book – Stores - Work charged establishment -Nominal muster roll - Daily labour reports

UNIT IV QUALITY CONTROL, MONITORING AND TRAINING 9

Importance and elements of quality - Organization for quality control - Total quality control - Quality control

circles - Quality assurance techniques - Statistical quality control with sampling by attributes & variables -

Training & development - Identification of training needs - Training Calendar - Outsourcing for training - Methods

of training - On job, in plant and in house training- Evaluation of training - Training to overcome deficiencies -

Performance appraisal - Documentation.

UNIT V MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM 9

Types of project information - Accuracy and use of information - Computerized organization - Management

information system - Organizing information in databases – Types of databases - Centralized database

management systems - Databases and application programs - Information transfer and flow.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Chitkara, K.K. “Construction Project Management Planning, Scheduling and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2010.

2. Chris Hendrickson and Tung Au, “Project Management for Construction – Fundamentals Concepts for

Owners, Engineers, Architects and Builders”, Prentice Hall, Pitsburgh, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Moder.J., C.Phillips and Davis, “Project Management with CPM, PERT and Precedence Diagramming”, Van

Nostrand Reinhold Co., Third Edition, 1983.

2. Willis., E.M., “Scheduling Construction projects”, John Wiley and Sons 1986.

3. Halpin,D.W., “Financial and cost concepts for construction Management”, John Wiley and Sons, New York,

1985.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati /cpm/index.html

2. http://theconstructor.org/?s=construction+planning

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati/cpm/index.html

97

15CE752 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To demonstrate a basic knowledge of CAD and the ability to use appropriate technique and procedures

for the care and use of hardware and software to produce a series of orthographic and isometric

drawings.

To demonstrate an understanding of various commands and command functions.

To explain about the detailing of various RC and Steel structures.

To understand the importance of developing precise basic entities.

To understand the importance of detailing for various structural components using computer techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Gain knowledge for the design and detail the different types of retaining walls and will be able to apply

the theoretical concepts in the real world construction.

Understand the importance of measuring systems and the measuring instruments involved in drafting

and related fields.

Design and draw the detailing of various types of water tanks (RC and STEEL) along with the staging

and foundation.

Plot the drawing using scaling technique as per industry requirement.

Design and draw the detailing involved in the plate girder.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

RC STRUCTURE

Design and Detailing of

Cantilever retaining wall

Counterfort retaining wall

Dog Legged Staircase

Rectangular underground water tank

Circular overhead water tank

STEEL STRUCTURE

Design and Detailing of

Pressed steel tank

Rectangular steel tank

Hemispherical bottom steel tank

Plate Girder

Truss with Purlin

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

98

REFERENCE BOOKS:


Ltd., New Delhi 2003.


2003.

3. Krishnamurthy, D., “Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. II”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, Delhi 1992.

4. Krishnamurthy, D., “Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. III Steel Structures”, CBS Publishers & Distributors,

New Delhi 1992.

5. Dr.B.C. Punmia, Ashok kumarjain and Arunkumarjain “Comprehensive design of steel structures”, Laxmi

Publications, 2nd

edition, 1998.

IS CODES:

1. IS 456:2000 - Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete

2. IS 875(1-5):1987 - Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures.

3. SP (16): 1980 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456-1978.

4. IS 800:2007 and IS 800:1984 - Codes of Practice for General Construction in steel.

5. SP6: Part 1:1964 - Handbook for Structural Engineers.

6. IS 3370: 2009 - Concrete structures for storage of liquids – Code of practice

7. IS 804: 1967 (reaffirmed in 2008) - Specifications for Rectangular steel tanks.

8. IS 805:1968 (reaffirmed in 2008) - Code of practice for use of steel in gravity water tanks

99

CORE ELECTIVES

V SEMESTER

15CEC01 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the necessity of adopting the basic green building concepts

To motivate to use the industrial wastes and by-products in the construction fields

To explore a new alternative building materials

To provide exposure on sustainable building blocks.

To popularize the cost effective construction techniques

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Realize the environmental issues related to construction materials

Employ the pozzolanic materials in construction

Utilize alternative construction materials

Develop building blocks from locally available materials

Apply new construction techniques.

COURSE PREREQUISITE:

Knowledge on Construction Materials

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS ON GREEN MATERIALS AND BUILDINGS 9

Introduction to Global Warming - Sources of global warming - Green buildings: Concepts - Rating – Rating by

various agencies - Materials used and their Efficiency - Comparison of conventional & green buildings -

Environment friendly and cost effective building technologies - Buildings with cost and energy efficient roofing

systems - Building in different climatic regions

UNIT II LIME - POZZOLANIC BINDERS 9

Lime stone - Pozzolana: Red mud, Powdered burnt clay(Surkhi), Metakaolin- Industrial wastes and by-products:

Rice Husk and Bark Ash, Fly ash, Silica fume, Micro silica, Nano silica, GGBS - Other mineral products: Lime -

Pozzolanic binders: Process - Properties and uses - mortars with combination of burnt clay and pozzolana -

Strength - Field practical aspects and implications.

UNIT III ALTERNATIVE BUILDING MATERIALS 9

Agro wastes and Biomass resources: Straw bale, Bamboo, Chemically treated thatch - Engineered Cementitious

Composites: Fibre Reinforced Cement Composites, Fibre Reinforced Polymer Composites, Geo-textiles and

Geo-synthetics - Masonry mortars: Structural masonry, Ferro-cement and Ferro-concrete, Glenium concrete -

Materials for nuclear containment structures - Crumb modified bitumen rubber - Foams and Light - Weight

materials –Introduction to smart materials

UNIT IV BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Aerocon and light weight blocks - Stones and laterite blocks - Burnt bricks - Solid and hollow concrete blocks -

Precast paver blocks - Burnt clay hallow blocks - Stabilized soil and mud blocks - Concepts, processes, sizes and

100

properties - Influence of density and binder content on strength - Stone masonry blocks - Cob rammed earth,

Earthen finishes, Earth plasters and floors - Modular contained earth - Earth bag construction

UNIT V ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES 9

Precast Techniques - Alternatives for wall construction - Types of walls - Alternative roofing systems - Concepts

- Micro concrete roofing(MCR) tiles - Roofing: asbestos sheets and G.I sheets - Tubes and light weight roofing -

Filler slab roofs - Composite beam and panel roofs - Ferro cement wall panels and roofing channel - Masonry

domes and vaults - Brick masonry domes - Brick masonry vaults - lateral thrust.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. K.S Jagadish, B.V. Venkatarama Reddy, K.S. NanjundaRao., “Alternative Building Materials and

Technologies”, New Age International (P) Ltd Publishers, 2007, Reprint 2014.

2. Neville,A.M.,“Properties of Concrete”, Pearson Education Asia (P) Ltd, England, 2000.

3. Kumar Mehta, P and Paulo J M Monteiro, “Concrete Microstructure, Properties and Materials”, McGraw Hill,

2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Shan Somayaji, “Civil Engineering Materials”, 2nd

Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.

2. Michael S. Mamlouk, John P. Zaniewski, “Materials for Civil and Construction Engineers”, 3rd

Edition,

Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Michael F. Ashby, D.R.H. Jones., “Engineering Materials 1: An Introduction to Properties, Applications and

Design” Elsevier Publications, 2005.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.theconstructor.org


15CEC02 ADVANCED SURVEYING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the basic principles and methods of hydrographic surveying.

To get introduced to the concept of astronomy in locating a celestial body.

To impart knowledge on the basics of aerial photogrammetry.

To learn on the principles of Electronic distance measurements, Total station and GPS.

To give exposure to advanced surveying techniques involved such as remote sensing, GIS, etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the right method in locating and plotting of soundings.

Locate a celestial body using different co-ordinate systems in astronomical surveying.

Interpret and scale aerial photographs.

Apply total station and EDM in distance measurement and traversing

Adopt advanced surveying techniques over conventional methods in the field of civil engineering.

http://www.amazon.com/Michael-S.-Mamlouk/e/B001JAR5OE/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=John+P.+Zaniewski&search-alias=books&text=John+P.+Zaniewski&sort=relevancerank

http://www.the/

101


Knowledge on Basic of Surveying

UNIT I HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEYING 9

Shore line survey - River survey- Sounding-Gauges & Equipment - Sounding Rods and Lead Lines- Sounding

Chain and lead- Sounding Machine, Fathometers, Signals, Sextants- Methods of sounding- Location of

soundings- Plotting of sounding-The Three point problem-Mechanical, Graphical& Analytical methods.

UNIT II ASTRONOMICAL SURVEYING 9

Celestial sphere - astronomical terms and definitions - motion of sun and stars - apparent altitude and corrections

- celestial co-ordinate systems - spherical trigonometry – latitude and longitude of a place - field observations and

calculations for azimuth- Nautical almanac.

UNIT III AERIAL PHOTOGRAMMETRY 9

Photogrammetry- types and geometry of aerial photograph- Photographic scale- Flying heights and altitude-

Relief and tilt displacement – corrections – Flight Planning-Layout of Photography.

UNIT IV EDM, TOTAL STATION, GPS SURVEYING 9

Electromagnetic distance measurement (EDM) – principle – types – Total station- working principle, GPS Basics

– system overview – working principle of GPS – Satellite ranging –calculating position- GPS Survey- types-

Kinematic and static survey techniques.

UNIT V BASICS OF REMOTE SENSING & GIS 9

Introduction – Historical Background - Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR) - Electromagnetic Spectrum -. Airborne

Platforms-Sensors -Types-optical Remote Sensing ,Microwave remote sensing-Applications of Remote sensing-

LIDAR,GIS-History of Development - Components of GIS- Data models – Raster and Vector data structures- –

Advanced applications of GIS.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXTBOOKS:

1. Satheesh Gopi, “Advanced Surveying”, Pearson Education, 2007


3. SatheeshGopi, “The Global Positioning System and Surveying using GPS”, Tata McGraw, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:


2. Bossler, J.D., “Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology”, Taylor and Francis,2002.

3. Burrough, P.A. and McDonnell, R.A., “Principles of Geographic Information System”, Oxford University

Press, 2000.

4. Duggal R.K, “Surveying” Vol. I and II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.

WEB REFERENCE:





http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107062



102

15CEC03 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To get exposed to various methods of dewatering techniques

To be familiar with compaction methods and influencing factors

To Understand about consolidation and vertical drains

To distribute Knowledge about various stabilization techniques and its applications

To learn various strengthening materials and techniques of soil

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Choose the suitable dewatering techniques

Identify the soil and select suitable compaction method

Monitor consolidation of soil

Apply suitable techniques for improving the soil properties in the field

Use various types of techniques to strengthen the soil


Knowledge on Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering

UNIT I DEWATERING 9

Introduction – Ground improvement – scope – necessity – New Technologies – Basic concepts – drainage

methods – ground water lowering by well points – Deep well – Vacuum and electro–osmosis methods.

UNIT II COMPACTION 9

Introduction – compaction mechanics – field procedure – Surface compaction – selection – compaction quality

control – Vibration methods – vibro-compaction, blasting, vibratory probe, vibratory compactors – vibro-

displacement compaction – displacement piles – vibroflotation – Sand compaction piles – stone columns – heavy

tamping.

UNIT III CONSOLIDATION AND VERTICAL DRAINS 9

Introduction – compressibility of soil and consolidation – preloading and surcharge fills – monitoring of

compression – vertical drains – principle, design, types, construction, efficiency and applications.

UNIT IV SOIL STABILIZATION 9

Introduction – Stabilization methods – mechanical stabilization, chemical stabilization-cement, lime, bitumen –

electrical stabilization – stabilization of expansive clays – Prewetting.

UNIT V MISCELLANEOUS METHODS 9

Grouting and injection – aspects, procedure and applications – geosynthetics – types, properties and applications

– soil reinforcement – thermal methods.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

103

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Klaus Kirsch and Alan Bell “Ground improvement” Taylor and Francis Group, 2013.

2. C.A.Raison, “Ground and Soil Improvement” Thomas Telford Publishing, London, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. M.P.Moseley and K.Kirsch, “Ground Improvement” Spon press, New york, 2004.

2. Purushothama Raj, P., “Ground Improvement Techniques”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.

3. Reuben H. Karol, “Chemical grouting and soil stabilization” Taylor and Francis, 2005.

4. Mittal.S, “An Introduction to Ground Improvement Engineering”, Medtech Publisher, 2013.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. Coduto, D.P. “Geotechnical Engineering – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd. New

Delhi, 2011.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/105108075/

2. http://ebookily.net/pdf/ground-improvement-techniques-notes

3. http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Civil%20Engineering/Foundation_Engineering/Course_home36.1.html

15CEC04

HYDROPOWER ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide knowledge on basic aspects of hydropower

To understand various types of hydropower plants

To acquire knowledge on design of various elements of power

To gain information on site selection for construction of dams

To realize the financial implications of hydropower plants

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the importance of hydropower potential

Select a suitable type of hydropower required for the site

Design a power canal based on power requirement

Gain knowledge on selection of site for a dam

Understand the economic aspects of hydropower plants


Knowledge on Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics

104

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Development of Water Power - Estimation of Hydropower potential - Comparison of hydro, Thermal and Nuclear

power - Sources of energy - status of hydropower - Advantages of hydropower - Place of hydropower in power

system - Analysis of stream flow and demand - Flow duration curve - firm power, Secondary power - Load and

Load duration curves - Load factor, etc

UNIT II TYPES OF HYDRO POWER PLANTS 9

Basic features of Hydropower plants - Classification of hydro power plants - Run-of-river plants - General lay out

of run of river plants - Valley dam plants - storage and pondage - Examples - High head diversion plants -

Diversion Canal Plants - Pumped storage plants - Tidal power plants

UNIT III WATER CONVEYANCE SYSTEM 9

Power Canals- Alignment, Design of Power canals – Flumes - Covered conduits and Tunnels – Penstocks -

Alignment, types of penstocks -Design criteria of penstocks - Economic Diameter of penstocks - Water hammer -

Anchor blocks- Surge tanks- Types - Surge analysis - Types of valves

UNIT IV DAMS & SPILLWAYS 9

Selection of site -, Preliminary Investigations - Final Investigations - Types of Dams - Rigid Dams - Gravity dams -

Arch and buttress dams - Basic principles of design and details of construction – Earthen dams, Design

considerations - spillways – Types - Spillway gates, Design of stilling basins

UNIT V POWER HOUSE DETAILS 9

Fore bay – Intakes - General layout of power house and arrangement of hydropower units - Underground Power

stations – Advantages – Ventilations - Transmission systems - General introduction - Financial implications of

Hydro Power plants.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dandekar and Sharma, “Water power Engineering “ , Vikas Publishing House Pvt .Ltd 2009

2. Madanmohan das, Mimi Das sakia, “Irrigation And Water Power Engineering”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:

3. R S Varshney, “Hydropower structures “, Volume III, Jain book depot, New Delhi , 2014

4. Dr. Darde P N, “Treatise on Hydropower Engineering edition” JBC Press 2012

105

15CEC05

AIRPORTS,DOCKS AND HARBOUR ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals related to the Planning of Airport components.

To provide knowledge on various airport facilities such as runway Geometric Design.

To create awareness about the various processes involved in the Air Traffic Control process.

To impart knowledge on various planning standards related to harbour construction.

To provide knowledge on various components of harbour and ports.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Plan the locations of the components of the airports.

Design the airport components and their geometric design.

Perform the air traffic control of aircrafts.

Plan and locate the components of the harbour.

Design the harbour components such as breakwaters and docks.


Knowledge on Highway Engineering

UNIT I AIRPORT PLANNING 9

Aircraft characteristics and its influence on airport planning. Topographical and geographical features-air traffic

characteristics. New airports- factors affecting airport site selection. Airport obstruction-Zoning laws-classification

of obstruction, imaginary surfaces.

UNIT II AIRPORT GEOMETRIC DESIGN 9

Runway orientation- wind rose diagrams - basic runway length-Corrections for runway length- airport

classification - airport capacity- runway configuration- taxiway design- geometric standards-exit taxiways. Holding

aprons - location of terminal buildings - aircraft hangers.

UNIT III AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL 9

Airport marking and lighting of runways - taxiways and approach areas. Terminals - planning of terminal building.

Apron - size of the gate position - number of gate position - aircraft parking system. Air traffic control- air traffic

control aids: Enroute aids - landing aids. Airport Drainage: requirements and advantages.

UNIT IV HARBOUR PLANNING 9

Wind-Waves-tides-Selection of site-draft conditions - entrance and channel requirement- Harbours-Ports-

Difference between port and harbour. Ship characteristics - their influence on ports management – operations.

Harbour layouts.

UNIT V HARBOUR COMPONENTS 9

Harbour components - break waters-types-special blocks-tetrapod – hexapod – tribars. Jetties- wharves- piers -

transit sheds-warehouses. Mooring - accessories - berthing facilities - dolphins. Docks-types - Navigational aids -

106

buoys – lighthouses - lightships – becons - containerisation - containers - container yards and handling

equipments

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Robert M. Horonjeff, Francis X. Mckelvey Planning and Design of Airports, TMH publishers,2010

2. Bindra S.P., Docks &Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai Publications (P) Ltd,New Delhi,2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. S.K.Khanna, M.G.Arora, S.S.Jain, Airport Planning & Design, Nemchand Bros, Roorkee,6th Edition, 2011.

Further Reading:

1. Alonzon De F. Quinn ,Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structures , McGraw-Hill Inc.,2000.

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Francis+X.+Mckelvey&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.flipkart.com/author/s-k-khanna

http://www.flipkart.com/author/m-g-arora

http://www.flipkart.com/author/s-s-jain

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Alonzon+De+F.+Quinn&search-alias=stripbooks

107

CORE ELECTIVE - I

VI SEMESTER

15CEC06 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the rudiments of probability

To solve problems using elementary probability distributions of one dimensional random variable

To impart the basics of testing of hypothesis

To introduce the concept of estimation using statistics and its usage in quality control

To expose the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific judgments in

the face of uncertainty and variation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

To be able to relate the real life problems with the concept of probability

To be able to solve real life problems that involves randomness

To be able to decide or check whether the difference in sample is significant or not

To be able to estimate parameters correctly that ensures quality of a product

To understand the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific

judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation.


Knowledge on Basic arithmetic

UNIT I PROBABILITY 9

Axioms of probability – conditional probability – Total probability – Baye’s theorem - Random variables - Discrete

and continuous random variables - Moments - Moment Generating Functions and their properties.

UNIT II ONE DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLE 9

Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions and their

properties - Functions of a Random variable.

UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9

Sampling distributions – Testing of hypothesis for mean, variance, proportions and differences using Normal, t,

Chi-square and F distributions - Tests for independence of attributes and Goodness of fit.

UNIT IV ESTIMATION & STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9

Point estimation –Interval estimation – Interval estimates of mean, standard deviation, proportion, difference in

means and ratios of standard deviation - Statistical basis for control charts – control limits – control charts for

variables – charts for defective – charts for defects.

UNIT V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9

Analysis of variance – One way classification – CRD - Two – way classification – RBD - Latin square.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

108

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Ross. S., “A first Course in Probability”, Pearson Education, Nineth Edition, Delhi 2012.

2. Johnson. R. A., “Miller & Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, Delhi,

7th edition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and

Scientists”, Seventh Edition, Pearsons Education, 9th Edition, 2011.

2. Lipschutz. S and Schiller. J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, McGraw-Hill,

New Delhi, 1st edition, 2011.

3. Gupta, S.C, and Kapur, J.N., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand, Ninth Edition,

New Delhi ,1996.

15CEC07 ARCHITECTURE

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE PREREQUISITE: Knowledge on Basics of civil engineering and Construction practice

COURSE OBJECTIVE:

To impart knowledge on the fundamentals of visual perception and principles.

To give exposure about architectural principles in the design of buildings.

To impart knowledge in the national traditions and the local regional heritage in architecture, landscape

design including the vernacular tradition.

To provide the basic principles and appropriate application and performance of building envelope

materials and assemblies.

To demonstrate competency in the technical, practical skills of landscape architecture and their role in

investigating complex and innovative ideas.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the fundamentals of visual perception in two- and three-dimensional design.

Introduce the architectural principles in the design of buildings and interior spaces.

Make plan for the buildings by considering our Indian climatic conditions.

Choose the various building material as per the interior design aspects.

Perform landscape architecture according to the environmental conditions.


Definition - Architecture – classification - influencing factors - region, culture, climate, topography, building

materials, economic and technology – historic structure - prominent world architecture - Anthropometrics –

Human scale - Space requirements in architecture.

UNIT II ELEMENTS OF ARCHITECTURE 9

Elements - Mass and space visual emotional effects of geometric forms and their derivatives – sphere, cube,

109

pyramid, cylinder and cone – aesthetic qualities of architecture: Proportion, scale, balance, symmetry, rhythm and

axis – contrast in form – Harmony.

UNIT III OREINTATION AND PLANNING OF BUILDINGS 9

General – factors affecting orientation – Sun – Wind – Rain – orientation criteria for Indian conditions – Planning–

Specifications and standards-planning of buildings – Green building- Carbon rating - case studies.

UNIT IV INTERIOR DESIGN 9

General – Decorative materials – Cement bonded boards, water proof cement – paint - industrial glazing and

roofing- masonry - Plaster and dry wall-wall surface materials - effect of colour – Home furnishing – Preparation

of interior design plans - case studies.

UNIT V LANDSCAPE DESIGN 9

Principles - Site planning - Design – Styles - Elements and materials - Plant characteristics and design -

Landscape planning - case studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Francis D.K.Ching, “Architecture: Form, Space and Order”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2007.

2. Mohmohan, MuthuShoba G, “Principles of Architecture” Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Arvind Krishnan ,”Climate Responsive Architecture: A Design Handbook for Energy Efficient Buildings” ,

McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2013

2. Simon Unwin, “Analysing Architecture”, Routledge, London, 2003

3. Edward D.Mills, “Planning and Architects Handbook”, Butterworth London, 1995.

4. Paul Alan Johnson, “The Theory of Architecture: Concepts, Themes & Practices”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

1994.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Leland M. Roth, Amanda C. Roth Clark “Understanding Architecture: Its Elements, History, and Meaning”,

Westview Press, 2013.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/architecture/

110

15CEC08 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PRACTICES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the reasons of accidents & hazards.

To identify method of safety against construction accidents.

To provide exposure on obligations for the duration of contract.

To implement plan for safety technology for the protection of workers.

To know the different way of health practice.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Identify the correct and proper method of managing accidents by analysing the actual situations.

Implement appropriate safety programmes at the site to make accident free construction

Adopt the contractual obligations which are essential in the site

Monitor safety precautions using technology

Realize the occupational hazards and to take remedial actions.


Knowledge on Construction Practices

UNIT I CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENTS 9

Accidents and causes - Accident prevention - Definition and principles - Potential hazards/risks associated with

construction sites - High risk activities - Use of hoists - Working at height & in confined space - Equipment Safety

-Costs of construction Injuries - Accident management.

UNIT II CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PROGRAMME 9

Introduction - Problem areas in construction safety - Elements of effective safety programme - Job safety analysis

- Fault tree analysis - Job-site safety assessment - Safety regulations at construction sites - Codes of practice -

Human factors in construction safety - Construction safety management - Safety meetings - Safety incentives -

Safety training - Safety policy - Safety committees - Safety inspection - Safety audit.

UNIT III CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS 9

Government's policy in industrial safety - Safety scenario in construction industries - Safety & health legislation

in India - The Factories Act, 1948-Equipment Safety -Safety provisions in construction contracts - Sub

contractual obligation - Workers compensation - Substance abuse - Safety record keeping

UNIT IV DESIGNING FOR SAFETY 9

Safety culture - Safe workers - First line supervisors - Middle managers - Top management practices - Company

activities on safety - Safety personnel - Project coordination and safety procedures - Safety technology -

Principles of risk and loss control - Machinery safety - Machine guarding - Workplace ergonomics including

display screen equipment and manual handling - Personal protective equipment - First aid and emergency

preparedness - Fire safety - Electrical hazards.

111

UNIT V OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PRACTICE 9

Statutory requirements and regulations related to health hazards - Legal Implications - Dust hazards and control -

Occupational and safety hazard assessment - Noise assessment and control measures - Impact and vibration -

OSHA, ISO 18001 & ISO 14001 code provisions - Case Studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jimmy W. Hinze, “Construction Safety”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2006.

2. Richard J. Coble, Jimmie Hinze and Theo C. Haupt, Construction Safety and Health Management,

Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. The Factories Act, 1948, Department of Labour, Government of India

2. Tamilnadu Factory Rules, 1950, Department of Inspectorate of factories, Tamil nadu

3. Darryl C. Hill, “Construction Safety Management and Engineering (2nd Edition)”, American Society

of Safety Engineers, 2014

4. David L. Goetsch, Stephen Beach, “Construction Safety and Health” (2nd Edition), Pearson

Education, Inc., 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://theconstructor.org/practical-guide/safety-management-at-construction-site/1666/

2. http://theconstructor.org/constrution/quality-and-safety-concerns-in-construction/1695/

15CEC09 GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand various hydrogeological parameters and their estimation

To impart knowledge of well hydraulics

To be familiar with various ground water management techniques

To provide information on ground water quality and its application

To emphasis the importance of ground water conservation

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Estimate the various aquifer parameters

Analyze the steady and unsteady state of flow into a well

Apply mathematical models for ground water management

Implement various saline water prevention techniques

Adopt appropriate rainwater harvesting techniques

http://www.gettextbooks.com/author/Darryl_C_Hill

http://www.gettextbooks.com/author/David_L_Goetsch

http://www.gettextbooks.com/author/Stephen_Beach

http://theconstructor.org/constrution/quality-and-safety-concerns-in-construction/1695/

112


Knowledge on Hydraulic Engineering

UNIT I HYDROGEOLOGICAL PARAMETERS 9

Introduction – Water bearing Properties of Rock – Type of aquifers - Aquifer properties – Permeability, specific

yield, transmissivity and storage coefficient – Methods of Estimation – Ground water table fluctuation and its

interpretations – Groundwater development and Potential in India – GEC norms.

UNIT II WELL HYDRAULICS 9

Objectives of Groundwater hydraulics – Darcy’s Law - Groundwater equation – steady state flow -

DupuitForchheimer assumption - Unsteady state flow - Theis method - Jacob method -Slug tests - Image well

theory – Partial penetrations of wells.

UNIT III GROUNDWATER MANAGEMENT 9

Need for Management Model – Database for groundwater management –groundwater balance study –

Introduction to Mathematical model – Conjunctive use – Collector well and Infiltration gallery.

UNIT IV GROUNDWATER QUALITY 9

Ground water chemistry - Origin, movement and quality - Water quality standards – Health and aesthetic aspects

of water quality - Saline water intrusion – Environmental concern and Regulatory requirements

UNIT V GROUNDWATER CONSERVATION 9

Artificial recharge techniques – Remediation of Saline intrusion– Ground water management studies – Protection

zone delineation, Contamination source inventory, remediation schemes - Ground water Pollution and legislation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Raghunath H.M.” Ground Water Hydrology”, New Age International (P) Limited, NewDelhi, 2010.

2. Todd D.K., “Ground Water Hydrology”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Fitts R Charles. Groundwater Science. Elsevier, Academic Press, 2002

2. Ramakrishnan, S, “Ground Water Hydrology”, K.J. Graph arts, Chennai, 1998.

15CEC10 HOUSING PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To train the students to have a comprehensive knowledge of housing projects.

To give awareness about the existing housing programmes.

To train the students to do the planning and design of housing projects

To give exposure on cost effective construction materials and methods.

To train the students to perform the project appraisal of housing projects.

113

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Plan and design the housing projects as per D.C.Regulations.

Design the various housing programme with sustainability concepts.

Formulate and design the housing layouts by conducting site analysis.

Evaluate the suitability of various cost effective construction materials.

Perform the economic analysis. Based project appraisal of housing projects.


Knowledge on Basic Civil Engineering & Engineering Economics and Cost analysis,

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HOUSING 9

Definition of Basic Terms –House, Home, Household -Row houses, Apartments, Multi storied Buildings, Special

Buildings, Objectives and Strategies of National Housing Policies, Principle of Sustainable Housing, Housing Laws

at State level, Bye-laws at Urban and Rural Local Bodies -DC Regulations, Institutions for Housing at National,

State and Local levels.

UNIT II HOUSING PROGRAMMES 9

Basic Concepts, Contents and Standards for various Housing Programmes -Sites and Services, Neighbourhoods,

Open Development Plots, Apartments, Rental Housing, Co-operative Housing, Slum Housing Programmes, Role

of Public, Private and Non-Government Organizations

UNIT III PLANNING AND DESIGN OF HOUSING PROJECTS 9

Formulation of Housing Projects –Site Analysis, Layout Design, Design of Housing Units (Simple design

problems)- Procedure for site analysis and layout planning.

UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND COST- EFFECTIVE MATERIALS 9

New Constructions Techniques – Cost Effective Modern Construction Materials, Building Centres – Concept,

Functions and Performance Evaluation.

UNIT V HOUSING FINANCE AND PROJECT APPRAISAL 9

Appraisal of Housing Projects – Housing Finance, Cost Recovery –Cash Flow Analysis, Subsidy and Cross

Subsidy, Pricing of Housing Units, Rents, Recovery Pattern (Problems)

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Meera Mehta and Dinesh Mehta, “Metropolitan Housing Markets”, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

1999.

2. Francis Cherunilam and Odeyar D Heggade, “Housing in India”, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay,

1997.

114

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Development Control Rules for Chennai Metropolitan Area, CMA, Chennai, 2002.

2. National Housing Policy, 1994, Government of India.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. UNCHS, National Experiences with Shelter Delivery for the Poorest Groups, UNCHS (Habitat), Nairobi,

1994.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. mhupa.gov.in/policies/duepa/HousingPolicy2007.pdf

2. nhb.org.in/Urban Housing/Housing policies.php

3. www.jstor.org/stable/4394929

4. mhupa.gov.in/pdf/guidelines-scheme/urbanemp.../buildingcentres.pdf

5. www.unido.org/.../Environment_friendly_Indian_building_material_tec

6. http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20110118095356/http:/www.cabe.org.uk/files/the-value-of-

housing-design-and-layout.pdf.

7. urbandesignproject.ap.buffalo.edu/pub/pdf/westside screenres.pdf

15CEC11 REMOTE SENSING AND GIS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the basics of EMR and its interaction with atmospheric windows.

To impart the knowledge on basics of platforms and sensors.

To provide the knowledge on interpretation of images

To get introduced on basic concepts of GIS.

To understand the process of storage and analysis of various data.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze Electromagnetic radiations and their interactions with atmosphere.

Classify and apply passive and active sensors.

Interpret and analyze the images.

Differentiate vector and raster data.

Analyze data models for different studies.


Knowledge on Surveying

UNIT I EMR AND ITS INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE 9

Definition of remote sensing and its components – Electromagnetic spectrum – wavelengthregions important to

remote sensing – Wave theory, Particle theory– Atmospheric scattering, absorption – Atmospheric windows –

spectral signature concepts – typical spectral reflective characteristics of water, vegetation andsoil.

115

UNIT II PLATFORMS AND SENSORS 9

Types of platforms – orbit types, Sun-synchronous and Geosynchronous – Passive and Activesensors-

resolution concept – Pay load description of important Earth Resources andMeteorological satellites – Airborne

and space borne TIR and microwave sensors.

UNIT III IMAGE INTERPRETATION AND ANALYSIS 9

Types of Data Products – types of image interpretation – basic elements of image interpretation- visual

interpretation keys – Digital Image Processing – Pre-processing – image enhancementtechniques –

multispectral image classification – Supervised and unsupervised.

UNIT IV GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM 9

Introduction – Maps – projections – types – map analysis –GIS definition – basic components of GIS – standard

GIS software – Data type – Spatial and non-spatial data – measurement scales – Data Base Management

Systems (DBMS).

UNIT V DATA ENTRY, STORAGE AND ANALYSIS 9

Data models – vector and raster data – data compression – data input by digitization andscanning – attribute

data analysis – integrated data analysis – Modeling in GIS Highwayalignment studies – Land Information

system.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Satheesh Gopi, “Advanced Surveying”, Pearson Education, 2007.

2. Duggal R.K, “Surveying” Vol. I and II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:


2. Anderson, J.M. and Mikhail, E.M., “Surveying: Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill, 1998

3. Schofield, W. and Breach M., “Engineering Surveying”, 6th Ed., Butterworth-Heineman,2007

4. Bossler, J.D., “Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology”, Taylor and Francis,2002.

3. Burrough, P.A. and McDonnell, R.A., “Principles of Geographic Information System”, Oxford University

Press, 2000.

WEB REFERENCES:





116

VII SEMESTER

CORE ELECTIVE - III

15CEC12 ADVANCED DESIGN OF RC STRUCTURES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop an understanding on the basic concepts in the behavior and design of reinforced concrete

structures such as Retaining Wall and counterfort retaining wall.

To provide knowledge on design of various components in the water tank by working stress method.

To provide knowledge on design of various reinforced concrete structures such as flat slabs and RC walls.

To explain the basic concepts about the yield line theory for the analysis and design of slab of various cross

sections.

To explain the behavior of reinforced masonry structures, and be able to design for flexure, shear, axial

forces, combined flexure and axial forces.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Gain knowledge for the design of different types of retaining walls and will able to apply the theoretical

concepts in the real world construction.

Design and detailing of different types of water tanks along with the staging and foundation.

Design and detailing of flat slabs and reinforced concrete walls.

Design square, rectangular, circular and triangular slabs using Yield line theory.

Design axially and eccentrically loaded brick walls based on the knowledge gained for various loading

conditions.


Knowledge on basics of Structural Analysis and Reinforced Concrete Element

UNIT I RETAINING WALLS 9

Retaining walls - Types - Earth pressure - Effects of surcharge - Stability requirements –Design of cantilever type

retaining wall and Counterfort type retaining wall - Detailing of reinforcement.

UNIT II WATER TANKS 9

General design requirements – Underground and tank resting on ground - Overhead Circular and rectangular tanks -

Analysis and design using Working Stress methods - Detailing of reinforcement - Codal provisions.

UNIT III FLAT SLABS AND RC WALLS 9

Types of flat slab - Design of Interior and Exterior panels using Direct Design Method - Use of design aids (SP16) -

Reinforced concrete walls.

UNIT IV YIELD LINE THEORY 9

Yield line – Assumptions – Characteristics – Upper Bound and Lower Bound Theories - Yield Line Analysis - Design of

slabs.

UNIT V BRICK MASONRY 9

Introduction - Classification of walls - Lateral supports and stability - Effective height of wall and columns - Effective

117

length of walls - design loads, load dispersion - Permissible stresses - Design of axially and eccentrically loaded brick

walls

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:


Ltd., New Delhi2009.

2. Dayaratnam, P., “Brick and Reinforced Brick Structures”, Oxford & IBH Publishing House, 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi 2014.

2. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

2002.


2003.

WEB REFERENCES:

http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105105.

CODE BOOKS:

1. IS 456 – 2000 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete – CODE OF PRACTICE (Fourth Revision).

2. SP 16 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS 456:1978.

3. IS 1905 – 1987 Code of Practice for Structural Use of Unreinforced masonry.

15CEC13 AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the students aware with the sources, effects and control of air pollution.

To impart the principles of dispersion characteristics of pollution.

To deliver with the concepts of design of control of air pollution.

To get knowledge in ideas and terms behind the air pollution management.

To make the students familiar with noise pollution.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Recognize the different of sources like manmade and natural ,their effects of air pollution

Publicize the dispersion characteristics and modeling of pollution in air.

Design the component for control of air pollution.

Get the ideas and terms like planning, zoning, Monitoring and enforcing laws in air pollution management.

Aware on the principles behind the sources, effects & control of noise pollution.

http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105105

118


Knowledge on Environmental Engineering

UNIT I SOURCES AND EFFECTS OF AIRPOLLUTANTS 9

Classificationofairpollutants–Particulatesandgaseouspollutants–Sourcesofair pollution –Source inventory–Effects of

airpollutionon human beings, materials, vegetation, animals–global warming-ozone layer depletion, Sampling and

Analysis – Basic Principles of Sampling– Source and ambient sampling – Analysis of pollutants– Principles.

UNIT II DISPERSION OF POLLUTANTS 9

Elements of atmosphere – Meteorological factors – Wind roses – Lapse rate Atmospheric stability and turbulence –

Plume rise–Dispersion of pollutants–Dispersion models–Applications.

UNIT III AIR POLLUTION CONTROL 9

Conceptsofcontrol–Principlesanddesignofcontrolmeasures–Particulatescontrolby gravitational, centrifugal, filtration,

scrubbing, electrostatic precipitation – Selection criteria for equipment- gaseous pollutant control by adsorption,

absorption, condensation,combustion–Pollutioncontrolforspecificmajorindustries.

UNIT IV AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9

Air quality standards–Air quality monitoring–Preventive measures – Air pollution controlefforts–Zoning–

Townplanningregulationofnewindustries–Legislationand enforcement–Environmental Impact Assessment and Air

quality

UNIT V NOISE POLLUTION 9

Sources of noise pollution–Effects–Assessment- Standards–Control methods– Prevention

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rao,C.S.EnvironmentalPollutionControl Engineering,WileyEasternLtd.,NewDelhi,1996.

2. RaoM.N.,andRaoH.V.N.,AirPollutionControl,Tata-McGraw-Hill,NewDelhi1996.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Lawrence K. Wang, Norman C. Pereira, Yung-Tse Hung, Air Pollution Control Engineering, Humana Press, 2004.

2. W.L.Heumann,IndustrialAirPollution Control Systems,McGraw-Hill,NewYork,1997.

3. Mahajan.S.P., Pollution Control in Process Industries, TMHCompany,NewDelhi,1991.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Garg,S.K.,“EnvironmentalEngineeringVol.II”,KhannaPublishers,NewDelhi

2. Mahajan,S.P.,“PollutionControlinProcessIndustries”,TataMcGraw-Hill,NewDelhi,1991

119

15CEC14 BRIDGE ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To get introduced to basic fundamentals of bridge design

To explore the design methodologies of superstructure of bridges.

To get familiarized with Substructure of bridges

To gain knowledge on fundamentals of bearings used in bridges

To get exposed to the conceptual knowledge on bridge maintenance

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyse various design codes on bridges and execute reconnaissance of the bridge design.

Design Superstructure of bridges.

Be proficient in Substructure of bridges

Evaluate the types of bearings used in bridges

Execute bridge maintenance and analyze case studies on bridges


Knowledge on Construction Techniques

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BRIDGE ENGINEERING 9

Historical background of bridges and types. Bridge aesthetics and proportioning. Design process. Review of applicable

design codes. Loads on bridges and force distribution. Bridge geometry. Conceptual design. Classification of Bridges.

Bridge Hydrology: determination of design discharge, linear water way, economical span, location of piers and

abutments, afflux, scour depth

UNIT II SUPERSTRUCTURE OF BRIDGES 9

Pigeaud’s method for computation of slab moments; courbon’s method for computation of moments in girders; Design

of simply supported T-beam bridge.

UNIT III SUBSTRUCTURE FOR BRIDGES 9

Piers - Abutments - Wing walls - Setting out for Piers and Abutments - Materials for substructures – Bridge Inspection

– Caissons – Cofferdams – Spread and Pile foundation

UNIT IV BEARINGS 9

Purposes of Bearings – Importance of Bearings – Free and Fixed Bearings - Types of Bearings - Bed Blocks –

Maintenance of Bearings

UNIT V BRIDGE MAINTENANCE 9

Bridge failures – case studies – Maintenance of bridges – Detailed Inspection – Routine Inspection – Posting of

Bridges – Rating of Existing bridges – Rebuilding Bridges – Retrofitting and Rehabilitation of bridges

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

120

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ponnuswamy.S “Bridge Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

2. KrishnaRaju.N“ Design of Bridges “, Oxford and IBH , 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bakht.B and Jaegar.L.G., “Bridge Analysis Simplified”, McGraw Hill, 1985.

2. Johnson Victor.D, “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, Oxford & IBH, 2007.

3. Jagadeesh T.R. and Jayaram .M.A., “Design of Bridge Structures”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., 2004.

4. Derrick Beckett, “An Introduction to Structural Design of Concrete Bridges”, Surrey University Press, Henley

Homes, Oxford Shire 1973.

5. Raina V.K., “Concrete Bridge Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1994.

6. KrishnaRaju. N “Structural Design and Drawing: Reinforced Concrete and Steel” , University Press (India) Pvt

Limited , 2004

7. Taylor F.W., Thomson S.E., &Smulski E., “Reinforced Concrete Bridges”. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1955.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Charles.S.Whitney , “Bridges of the World: Their Design and Construction” ,Dover Publications Inc , 2003

2. Wai – Fah Chen and LianDuan , “ Bridge Engineering Hand Book : Super Structure Design ”, CRC Press, 2014.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.fgg.uni-lj.si/~/pmoze/esdep/master/wg01b/l0610.htm

2. http://www.unimasr.net/ums/upload/files/2013/Apr/

3. UniMasr.com_c201d5e6815f239421e61f8ddc0dd7fe.pdf

4. http://publications.lib.chalmers.se/records/fulltext/146546.pdf

5. http://web.iku.edu.tr/courses/insaat/eng002-i/lecturenotes/Bridges%20presentation_Dr%20Kiymaz_ENG002.pdf

CODE BOOKS:

1. IRC: 6 - 2014 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section II - Loads and Stresses

(Fifth Revision).

2. IRC: 21 - 2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section III - Cement Concrete

(Plain and Reinforced) (Third Revision).

3. IRC: 22 - 2008 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section VI - Composite

Construction (Limit States Design) (Second Revision).

4. IRC: 24 - 2010 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Steel Road Bridges (Limit State

Method) Third Revision.

5. IRC: 83 - 1999 (Part-I) Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX - Bearings, Part

I: Metallic Bearings (First Revision).

6. IRC: 83 - 1987 (Part II) Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX - Bearings, Part

II: Elastomeric Bearings.

7. IRC: 83 - 2002 (Part III) Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX - Bearings,

Part III: POT, POT-CUMPTFE, PIN and Metallic Guide Bearings.

http://www.fgg.uni-lj.si/~/pmoze/esdep/master/wg01b/l0610.htm

http://www.unimasr.net/ums/upload/files/2013/Apr/

http://publications.lib.chalmers.se/records/fulltext/146546.pdf

http://web.iku.edu.tr/courses/insaat/eng002-i/lecturenotes/Bridges%20presentation_Dr%20Kiymaz_ENG002.pdf

121

15CEC15 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To train the students to have a comprehensive knowledge of coastal zone and its components.

To give exposure on types of waves and their characteristics.

To educate the students about the variety of coasts and profiles of beaches.

To provide knowledge on coastal processes happening along the coast.

To give awareness about the various coastal zone management measures.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Plan and map the elements of the coastal zone.

Comprehend the characteristics of the waves.

Apply the knowledge of coastal profiles on design of coastal structures

Analyse the Coastal processes and their impact on coastal structure.

Develop new strategies to protect the coastal zone against the natural and manmade disasters.


Knowledge on Coastal Engineering

UNIT I COASTAL ZONE 9

Coastal zone – CZR provisions – beach profile – surf zone, beach, wave breaking zone– off shore – coastal waters –

estuaries – wet lands and lagoons – living and non-living resources.

UNIT II WAVE CHARACTERISTICS 9

Wave classification – deep, shallow water waves – wave pressure, energy and decay – reflection, refraction,

diffraction of waves and breaking of waves –structures – type of barriers.

UNIT III COASTAL PROFILES 9

Seas and Oceans – classification – continental area – coastal zone – coral reefs – mangroves – wetlands –

importance – food, transportation, recreation – reef structure, types, and formation – mangrove distribution-

dynamic beach profile; cross-shore transport- littoral transport -sediment movement .

UNIT IV COASTAL PROCESSES 9

Erosion and depositional shore features – methods of protection – littoral currents – coastal aquifers – sea water

intrusion – impact of sewage disposal in seas.

UNIT V POLLUTION MANAGEMENT 9

Structures near coast –types and selection of break waters –dredging –Domestic Pollution- Water pollution- Industrial

Pollution- effect of mangrove forest—conservation of coast and management strategies – global policies –

conservation strategies in different countries.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

122

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dwivedi, S.N., Natarajan, R and Ramachandran, S., “Coastal Zone Management in Tamilnadu”,2009.

2. Sunil Dighe , “Guideline for Preparation of Coastal Zone Management Plans ,GOI, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Doody, J.P. Coastal Conservation and Management: An Ecological Perspective. Springer, 2000.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.sicommoef.in/Data/Sites/1/docs/sczma%20website.pdf

2. www.iczmpodisha.org/

3. envfor.nic.in/...links/national-coastal-zone-management-authority-nczma envfor.nic.in/legis/crz.htm

15CEC16 CONTRACT LAWS AND REGULATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study various elements in the contract document.

To review different concepts of Tender making process as per contract law.

To get an information on arbitration procedure during disputes.

To study the various taxes related to construction business and statutory recommendations.

To know the complexity of labour laws along with legislation in the construction industries.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Prepare contract document for various government & non-governmental works.

Make tender as per the current rates along with guidelines from sources.

Understand the factors of arbitration during the time of court proceedings.

Exercise correctly the procedure during sell; buy their land & property oriented with various tax provisions.

Adopt and follow the various acts and laws related to labour in the field.


Knowledge on Legal procedures in construction

UNIT I CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 9

Indian contracts act - Elements of contracts - Types of contracts - Features - Suitability - Design of contract

documents - International contract documents - Standard contract documents - Law of torts

UNIT II TENDERS 9

Prequalification –Tender notice – Attachments - Bidding - Accepting - Evaluation of tender from technical, contractual

and commercial points of view - Contract formation and interpretation - Potential contractual problems - World bank

procedures and guidelines - Transparency in tenders act.

UNIT III ARBITRATION 9

Arbitration – Need - Conditions of arbitration - Comparison of acts and laws - Agreements - Subject matter -

Violations - Appointment of arbitrators - Powers and duties of arbitrator - Rules of evidence - Enforcement of award.

123

UNIT IV LEGAL REQUIREMENTS 9

Insurance and bonding - Laws governing sale, purchase and use of urban and rural land - Land revenue codes - Tax

laws - Income tax, sales tax, excise and custom duties and their influence on construction costs - Legal requirements

for planning - Property law - Agency law - Local government laws for approval - Statutory regulations

UNIT V LABOUR REGULATIONS 9

Laws for social security - Welfare legislation - Laws relating to wages, bonus, industrial disputes and labour

administration - Insurance and safety regulations - Workmen’s compensation act - Indian factory act - Tamilnadu

factory act - Child labour act - Other labour laws

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. GajariaG.T.,Laws Relating to Building & Engineering Contracts in India,M.M.Tripathi Pvt. Ltd.,Bombay, 1982

2. Jimmie Hinze, Construction Contracts, Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Joseph T. Bockrath, Contracts and the Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects, Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill,

2000.

WEB REFERENCES:

1.http://theconstructor.org/?s=construction+law

CORE ELECTIVE - IV

15CEC17 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give exposure to basic law of economics.

To introduce the concepts of demand and supply of the products

To impart knowledge on financial aspects related to the business.

To provide exposure on short term and long term financing of business.

To study the different methods of appraisal of projects.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After successful completion of this course, the students will be able to

Apply the concepts of managerial economics to study the utility of the product

Analyse the influence of demand and supply on pricing of products

Apply the concepts of partnership in companies for its growth.

Analyse the financial conditions of the company based on the financial instruments

Formulate the strategies to fix product pricing and study its impact on break even analysis.


Knowledge on Principles of Management and Estimation and costing

http://theconstructor.org/?s=construction+law

124

UNITI BASIC ECONOMICS 9

Definition of economics -nature and scope of economic science - managerial economics -basic concepts -goods -

utility -value - wealth - factors of production - land -its peculiarities - labour -economies of large and small scale -

consumption -wants -its characteristics and classification -law of diminishing marginal utility -relation between

economic decision and technical decision.

UNITII DEMAND AND SUPPLY 9

Demand -demand schedule -demand curve -law of demand -elasticity of demand -types of elasticity -factors

determining elasticity -measurement -its significance -supply -supply schedule -supply curve -law of supply -elasticity

of supply -time element in the determination of value -market price and normal price -perfect competition -monopoly -

monopolistic competition.

UNITIII ORGANISATION 9

Forms of business -proprietorship -partnership -joint stock company -cooperative organisation -state enterprise -

mixed economy -money and banking -banking -kinds -commercial banks -central banking functions -control of credit -

monetary policy -credit instrument.

UNITIV FINANCING 9

Types of financing Short term borrowing -Long term borrowing -Internal generation of funds -External commercial

borrowings -Assistance from government budgeting support and international finance corporations -analysis of

financial statement –Balance Sheet -Profit and Loss account -Funds flow statement.

UNITV COST AND BREAK EVEN ANALYSIS 9

Types of costing –traditional costing approach -activity base costing -Fixed Cost –variable cost –marginal cost –cost

output relationship in the short run and in long run –pricing practice –full cost pricing –marginal cost pricing –going

rate pricing –bid pricing –pricing for a rate of return –appraising project profitability –internal rate of return –payback

period –net present value –cost benefit analysis –feasibility reports-Detailed project reports–appraisal process –

technical feasibility-economic feasibility –financial feasibility. Break even analysis -basic assumptions –break even

chart –managerial uses of break even analysis.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dewett K.K. &Varma J.D., “Elementary Economic Theory” ,S Chand & Co., 2006.

2. Samuelson, P. A. &Nordhaus W.D.,” Economics”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Adhikary M., “Managerial Economics”, Khosla Educational publishers,Delhi,1999.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Sharma,K.K , “Principle of Economics”, Abishek publications,2002.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.eng.auburn.edu/users/parkcha/cee/

2. www.helsinki.fi/WebEc/

3. economicsonline.co.uk

4. ecedweb.unomaha.edu/

5. ecedweb.unomaha.edu/teach-ec.cfm

125

15CEC18 CONCEPTS OF FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To equip the students with the Finite Element Analysis fundamentals

To understand the direct stiffness matrix method to solve civil engineering problems.

To give exposure to select suitable mathematical model for complex problems.

To enable to form and solve two dimensional problems.

To introduce the advanced topics in FEM.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis.

Use the direct stiffness matrix method for solving civil engineering problems.

Select suitable mathematical model for complex problems.

Form and solve two dimensional problems.

Gain knowledge on advanced topics in FEM.


Knowledge on Matrix methods of Analysis

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS 9

Concept of an element - various element shapes - one, two and three dimensional elements - finite element

procedure - stresses and equilibrium - boundary conditions - strain displacement relations - stress strain relations

- Potential energy and equilibrium – Weighted residual and weak formulations – Variational approach – Rayleigh

Ritz method.

UNIT II DIRECT STIFFNESS METHOD 9

Steps in direct method of FEA – element stiffness matrix – global stiffness matrix – boundary conditions – simple

problems on beams and trusses.

UNIT III ELEMENT SHAPES, NODAL UNKNOWNS AND COORDINATE

SYSTEMS

9

Discretization - basic element shapes - element properties – node numbering procedure – convergence

requirements – generalised co-ordinates – natural co-ordinates – shape functions for linear & quadratic models –

stiffness matrix – nodal load vector – static condensation – simple problems.

UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9

Introduction – finite element modelling – constant strain triangle – isoparametric representation – potential energy

approach - element stiffness – force terms – stress calculations – introduction to beam element.

UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS AND NUMERICAL INTEGRATION 9

Introduction – higher order elements and its applications - concept of sub, iso and super parametric elements –

shape functions - Gaussian quadrature – examples in one and two dimensional elements

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

126

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., “Introduction to Finite Element in Engineering”, Third Edition,

Prentice Hall, India, 2003.

2. Krishnamoorthy C. S. ,"Finite Element Analysis Theory and Programming", Tata McGraw Hill Education,

1994

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajasekaran, S., "Finite Element Methods in Engineering Design", Wheeler, 1993.

2. Reddy J.N., “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill, Intl. Student Edition, 1985.

3. Zienkiewics, “The finite element method, Basic formulation and linear problems”, Vol.1, 4th Edition,

McGraw-Hill, Book Co., 1987

4. Rao S.S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergaman Press, 2003.

5. David V. Hutton, "Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill, 2004

EXTENSIVE READING

1. Daryl L. Logan, "A First Course in Finite Element Method", Cengage Learning, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.colorado.edu/engineering/cas/courses.d/IFEM.d/

15CEC19 PAVEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals related to the pavement failures

To provide knowledge on various roads and their maintenance operations

To create awareness about the various types of bituminous surfaces.

To impart knowledge on various pavement management systems.

To provide knowledge on pavement distress models.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the concepts and knowledge of pavement failures in road maintenance.

Decide over the choices of maintenance operations applicable for the road.

Analyse the various bituminous surfaces and chose the perfect pavement finishing.

Formulate the pavement management systems to check the performance.

Forecast the pavement failure based on the pavement failure models developed.



127

UNIT I PAVEMENT DISTRESSES 9

Distresses in flexible/rigid pavements - causes and remedies - Measurement of Serviceability using

equipments like Bump Indicator, Skid tester & Benkelman Beam - Functional evaluation of pavements-

Serviceability Concepts, Visual Rating, Pavement Serviceability Index, Skid Resistance, Roughness, and

Safety Aspects.

UNIT II MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS 9

Classification of maintenance operations, Routine, Periodic, Special - Common types of maintenance: Potholes,

Cracked surface, Ruts & undulations, Resurfacing and Interface treatments,

UNIT III BITUMINOUS COURSES 9

Seal Coat, Surface Dressing, Premixed carpet, Micro asphalt concrete (MAC), Bituminous Surface

Courses- Semi-Dense Bituminous Concrete, Bituminous Concrete. Road maintenance in high rainfall areas.

Choice of materials. Modified bitumen & geo-fabrics.

UNIT IV PAVEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Components of PMS and their Activities - Major Steps in Implementing PMS - Inputs, Design, Construction

and Maintenance -HDM package - Highway Financing- Evaluation of Alternate Strategies.

UNIT V PAVEMENT DETERIORATION MODELS 9

Factors that affect performance - Types of prediction models - Prediction deterioration model development -

Method to assess the precision and accuracy -Emerging Technology.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Khanna and Justo, “Principles and practice of Highway engineering”, Khanna Publishers.2005.

2. SK Sharma, “Text book on Highway Engineering”, Chand & Co .publishers,2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hay W.W., “Introduction to transportation Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 2005.

2. Papacostas C.S., “Fundamentals of transportation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

128

15CEC20 FUNDAMENTALS OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basic principles of prefabrication.

To be thorough with the calculation of handling and erection stresses.

To know about dimensioning and detailing of joint.

To acquire knowledge on erection of structures.

To get familiar with the design principles of prefabricated units

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the various types of prefabrication systems.

Calculate the handling and erection stresses.

Prepare dimensioning and detailing of joints.

Perform erection ofthe prefab structure.

Design pre-fabricated units.


Knowledge on Modern Construction Techniques


Modular co-ordination – Components - Prefabrication systems and structural schemes - Types of foundation -

Design considerations - Economy of prefabrication - Prefabrication of load-carrying members - Disuniting of

structures - Structural behaviour of precast structures.

UNIT II HANDLING AND ERECTION STRESSES 9

Handling and erection stresses - Application of pre stressing of roof members – Floor systems - Two way load

bearing slabs - Wall panels

UNIT III DIMENSIONING AND DETAILING OF JOINTS 9

Dimensioning and detailing of joints for different structural connections – Construction joints and expansion joints.

UNIT IV ERECTION OF STRUCTURES 9

Production - Transportation and Erection - Organizing of production - Storing and erection equipment - Shuttering

and mould design - Dimensional tolerances, Erection of R.C. structures -Total prefabricated buildings

UNIT V DESIGN OF PRE FABRICATED UNITS 9

Prefabricated units for Industrial structures, Multi-storied buildings and Water tanks etc., Application of pre

stressed concrete in prefabrication.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

129

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Hubert Bachmann, Alfred Steinle, “Precast Concrete Structures”, Ernst and Sohn GMBH & Co., K.G.,

2011.

2. "Structural design manual", Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies inthe use of

precast concrete, Netherland BetorVerlag, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.Lewicki, “Building with Large Prefabricates”, Elsevier Publishing Company, Amsterdam / London /

New York, 1966.

2. Levit, M., (2000), Precast concrete materials, Manufacture properties and usage, Applied Science

Publishers, London.

3. Kim S. Elliott, “Precast Concrete Structures” Butter – Heinemann, 2002.

4. LassloMokk, “Prefabricated Concrete for Industrial and Public Sectors, AkademiaiKiado”, Budapest,

1964.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. David A.Sheppard, William R. and Philips, “Plant cast precast and prestressed concrete – A design

guide”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1992.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://sharepdf.net/find/anna-university-lecture-notes-for-prefabricatedstructures

2. http://www.mamce.org/ematerial/notes/civil/7sem/CE1007-PS-1&2.pdf

15CEC21 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Course Objectives:

To study the reasons of crack formations.

To Identify the formation of moisture in the structures.

To Recognize deterioration of concrete buildings.

To Know Deficiencies in various forms of steel constructions.

To Aware of Strengthening techniques for prevailing structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the various patterns of cracks for different failure.

Restrict moisture movement internally and externally.

Select suitable Repair techniques for different deterioration.

Pick right techniques to eliminate distressing in steel arrangements.

Comparison of verities of rehabilitation techniques according to requirement.

130


Knowledge on building materials and construction techniques

UNIT I BUILDING CRACKS 9

BUILDING CRACKS: Causes – Diagnosis – Remedial measures – Thermal and Shrinkage cracks – Unequal

loading – Vegetation and trees – Chemical action – Foundation movements – Techniques for repair - Repair

materials

UNIT II MOISTURE PENETRATION 9

Sources off dampness – Moisture movement from ground – Reasons for ineffective DPC – Roof leakage –

Pitched roofs –– Leakage of Concrete slabs –Dampness in solid walls – Condensation – Hygroscopic salts-

Remedial treatments – Ferro cement overlay – Chemical coatings – Flexible and rigid coatings.

UNIT III CONCRETE STRUCTURES 9

Introduction – Causes of deterioration – Diagnosis of causes – Flow charts for diagnosis – Methods of repair –

Repairing spalling and disintegration – Repairing of concrete floors and pavements.

UNIT IV STEEL STRUCTURES 9

Types and causes for deterioration – Preventive measures – Repair procedure – Brittle fracture – Lamellar

tearing – Defects in welded joints – Mechanism of corrosion – Design to protect against corrosion – Design and

fabrication errors – Distress during erection.

UNIT V STRENGTHENING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 9

General principles – Relieving loads – Strengthening super structures – Plating – Conversion to composite

construction – Post stressing – Jacketing – Bonded overlays - Reinforcement addition – Strengthening

substructures – Under pinning – Increasing load capacity of footing – Design for rehabilitation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1.Guha, P.K, “Maintenance and Repairs of Buildings”, New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd, Calcutta, 2011.

2.Ghosh, S.K, “Repair and Rehabilitation of Steel Bridges”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1988.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.Macdonald, S, “Concrete - Building Pathology”, Blackwell Science Limited, Oxford, 2008.

2.Shetty, M.S, “Concrete Technology – Theory and Practice”, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.

3.Chudley, R, “The Maintenance and Adaptation of Buildings”, Longman Group Ltd, New York, 2002.

4.Strecker, P.P, “Corrosion Damaged Concrete – Assessment and Repair”, Butterworths, London, 1987.

5. Johnson, S.M, “Deterioration, Maintenance and Repair of structures”, Krieger Publishing Company,

Melbourne, 1980.

131

Core Elective - V

15CEC22 SMART MATERIALS AND MEASURING TECHNIQUES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide the fundamentals of the smart materials.

To understand the measuring techniques using smart materials.

To give exposure to select suitable sensor for analyzing problems.

To enable to select and use the different actuator material.

To introduce signal processing and control system in smart structures.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the fundamentals of Smart material.

Use the measuring techniques using smart materials for solving civil engineering problems.

Select suitable sensors for analyzing various measurements.

Adaptthe different actuator material in structural components.

Apply signal processing and control system in smart structures.


Knowledge on instrumentation and Modern Materials


Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures – Instrumented structures, functions and response –Sensing

systems – Self-diagnosis – Signal processing consideration – Actuation systems and effectors.

UNIT II MEASURING TECHNIQUES 9

Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges, Types – Resistance – Capacitance – Inductance –

Wheatstone bridges – Pressure transducers – Load cells – Temperature Compensation – Strain Rosettes.

UNIT III SENSORS 9

Sensing Technology – Types of Sensors – Physical Measurement using Piezo Electric Strain measurement –

Inductively Read Transducers – The LVDT – Fibre optic Techniques- Accelerometers- Force Sensors- Load

Cells-Torque Sensors- Pressure Sensors- Microphones- Impact Hammers- MEMS Sensor- Sensor Arrays

UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9

Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive Material – Magneto

structure Material – Shape Memory Alloys – Electro rheological Fluids– Electromagnetic actuation – Role of

actuators and Actuator Materials - Displacement Actuators, Force Actuators, Power Actuators, Vibration

Dampers

UNIT V SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Data Acquisition and Processing – Signal Processing and Control for Smart Structures – Sensors as Geometrical

Processors – Signal Processing – Signal-Conditioning Devices; Constant Voltage, Constant Current and Pulse

Drive Methods; Structural Dynamics and Identification Techniques - Control System – Linear and Non-Linear ,

Passive, Semi-Active and Active Control, Feedback and Feed forward Control Strategies

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

132

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Brain Culshaw – Smart Structure and Materials Artech House – Boston. London-1996.

2. J. W. Dally & W. F. Riley – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. L. S. Srinath – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.

2. M.V. Gandhi and B.S. Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman & Hall, London; New York,

1992 (ISBN: 0412370107).

3. G. Gautschi, Piezoelectric Sensorics: Force, Strain, Pressure, Acceleration and Acoustic Emission

Sensors, Materials and Amplifiers, Springer, Berlin; New York, 2002 (ISBN: 3540422595).

EXTENSIVE READING

1. A.V. Srinivasan, Smart Structures: Analysis and Design, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge; New York,

2001 (ISBN: 0521650267).

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.mide.com

15CEC23 INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the principles of vibration, response of structural systems to dynamic loads and displacements.

To learn the behaviour and response of structures subjected to harmonic and periodic loading.

To study the behaviour and response of SDOF structures with Step and pulse dynamic loading.

To impart knowledge on SDOF earthquake response of linear systems.

To study the behaviour and response of MDOF structures with various dynamic loading.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course the student will be able to

Understand the response of structural systems to dynamic loads and displacements.

Realize the behaviour and response of structures subjected to harmonic and periodic loading.

Predict the response of SDOF structures with Step and pulse dynamic loading.

Analyse the earthquake response of SDOF linear systems.

Analyse the structures with MDOF system under dynamic loading.


Knowledge on Statics

UNITI INTRODUCTION 9

Vibration and its importance to structural engineering problems – Problem Statement- Basic concepts of

structural dynamics-single degree of freedom system - Solution Methods of Single Degree of Freedom Systems

133

(SDOF) - force displacement relationship-damping force- equation of motion- mass-spring-dampersystem-

methods of solution of differential equation.

Free Vibration (SDOF): Undamped free vibration viscously damped free vibration.

UNITII RESPONSE TO HARMONIC AND PERIODIC EXCITATIONS (SDOF) 9

Harmonic vibration of undamped systems- Harmonic vibration with viscous damping-response to

vibrationgenerator- natural frequency and damping from harmonic test- force transmission and vibration isolation-

vibration measuring instruments- Response to periodic force.

UNITIII RESPONSE TO ARBITRARY, STEP AND PULSE EXCITATIONS (SDOF) 9

Response to unitimpulse-response to arbitrary force-step force- ramp force- response to pulse excitations-

solution methods- effects of viscous damping.

Numerical Evaluation of Dynamic Response (SDOF): Time step methods- methods based oninterpolation of

excitation-central difference method- new mark’s method- analysis of nonlinear response by newmark’s method.

UNITIV EARTHQUAKE RESPONSE TO LINEAR SYSTEMS (SDOF) 9

Earthquake excitation- equation of motion- response quantities- response history- responsespectrum concept-

peakstructural response from the response spectrum- response spectrum characteristics.

Generalised Single Degree of Freedom Systems: Generalised single degree of freedom system-system with

distributed mass and elasticity-lumped mass system-shearbuilding- natural vibration frequency by Rayleigh’s

method.

UNITV MULTI -DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS (MDOF) 9

Equation of motions-simple system two storey shear building-general approach for linearsystems-static

condensation.

Free Vibration: Natural frequencies and modes-modal and spectral matrices-Orthogonality of modes-

normalization of modes- Solution of undamped free vibration systems- solution methods for Eigenvalue problem.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. MadhujitMukhopadhyay, “Structural Dynamics Vibrations and Systems”, ANE Books India Publishers, 2010.

2. Mario Paz, Structural Dynamics, “Theory and Computation”, Kluwer Academic Publication, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Anil K.Chopra, “Dynamics of Structures”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2014.

2. Clough R W and Penzien J, “Dynamics of Structures”, McGraw Hill, INC, 1993.

3. Roy R.Craig, Jr, Andrew J. Kurdila, Fundamentals of Structural Dynamics, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

4. Leonard Meirovitch, “Elements of Vibration Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1986,IOS Press, 2006.

5. Manickaselvam, V.K., “Elementary Structural Dynamics”, DhanpatRai& Sons, 2001.

134

15CEC24 WASTE WATER ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the students aware with the principles of collection, and planning for wastewater.

To make the students familiar in conveyance of wastewater.

To make the students aware with primary treatment of wastewater.

To make the students conscious on secondary treatment of wastewater.

To make the students knowledgeable with sludge management and disposal of wastewater.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Realize the Planning and learning of basic concepts of wastewater collection system.

Understand the water sources and wastewater quality characteristics and stds.

Identify the concepts behind the Design of appurtenances involved & Transmission main pipes and Pumps.

Understand the concepts and terminologies behind the various wastewater treatment units.

Know the principles behind the design using Planning and learning concepts of wastewater disposal & outfall

design and House drainage and plumbing systems.


Knowledge on Water Supply Engineering

UNIT I PLANNING FOR SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 9

Sources of wastewater generation – Effects – Estimation of sanitary sewage flow – Estimation of storm runoff –

Factors affecting Characteristics and composition of sewage and their significance – Effluent standards –

Legislation requirements.

UNIT II SEWER DESIGN 9

Sewerage – Hydraulics of flow in sewers – Objectives – Design period -Design of sanitary and storm sewers –

Small bore systems -Computer applications – Laying, joining & testing of sewers – appurtenances – Pumps –

selection of pumps and pipe Drainage -. Plumbing System for Buildings – One pipe and two pipe system.

UNIT III PRIMARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9

Objective – Unit Operation and Processes – Selection of treatment processes – Onsite sanitation -Septic tank,

Grey water harvesting – Primary treatment – Principles, functions design and drawing of screen, grit chambers

and primary sedimentation tanks– Operation and Maintenance aspects.

UNIT IV SECONDARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9

Objective – Selection of Treatment Methods – Principles, Functions, Design and Drawing of Units -Activated

Sludge Process and Trickling filter, other treatment methods – Oxidation ditches, UASB – Waste Stabilization

Ponds – Reclamation and Reuse of sewage -Recent Advances in Sewage Treatment – Construction and

Operation & Maintenance of Sewage Treatment Plants.

UNIT V DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE AND SLUDGE 9

Standards for Disposal -Methods – dilution – Self-purification of surface water bodies – Oxygen sag curve – Land

disposal – Sewage farming – Deep well injection – Soil dispersion system -Sludge characterization – Thickening

135

– Sludge digestion – Biogas recovery – Sludge Conditioning and Dewatering – disposal – Advances in Sludge

Treatment and disposal.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering Vol. II, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Punmia,B.C.,Jain,A.K.,andJain.A.,Environmental Engineering, Vol.II, Lakshmi Publications, Newsletter,

2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, Government of

India, New Delhi, 1997.

2. Waste Water Engineering – Treatment and Reuse, Tata Mc.Graw-Hill Company, New Delhi, 2003.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering II”, Standard Book House, Delhi – 6

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.wastewatereducation.org/

2. www. water.worldbank.org

15CEC25

WATER RESOURCES SYSTEM PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on water resources of the country

To understand various components of hydrological cycle

To realize the importance of utilizing water judiciously

To be familiar with various flood control techniques

To provide training on cost benefit analysis

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Collect all kinds of hydrological data and perform the analysis

Design the optimum rain gauge network

Prepare the water budget and development plan

Estimate the sediment load in reservoirs

Perform economic analysis of water resource projects


Knowledge on Water Supply Engineering

136


Water resources survey – Water resources of India and Tamilnadu – Description of water resources planning –

Economics of water resources planning, physical and socio economic data – National Water Policy – Collection

of meteorological and hydrological data for water resources development.

UNIT II HYDROLOGIC CYCLE 9

Components of Hydrological cycle - system representation– Historical development of hydrology – Weather

system – cloud and cloud seeding - General atmospheric circulation – Types and forms of precipitation –

measurement of rainfall – optimum rain gauge network design

UNIT III WATER RESOURCE NEEDS 9

Consumptive and non-consumptive water use - Estimation of water requirements for irrigation, for drinking and

navigation - Water characteristics and quality – Scope and aims of master plan - Concept of basin as a unit for

development - Water budget and development plan.

UNIT IV RESERVOIR PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 9

Reservoir - Single and multipurpose – Multi objective - Fixation of Storage capacity –Strategies for reservoir

operation - Sedimentation of reservoirs - Design flood-levees and flood walls - Channel improvement – flood

warning – mitigation measures

UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9

Estimation of cost and Evaluation of Benefits - Discount rate - Discounting factors – Discounting techniques –

Computer Applications

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Linsley R.K. and Franzini J.B, “Water Resources Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Inc, 2000.

2. Douglas J.L. and Lee R.R., “Economics of Water Resources Planning”, Tata McGraw-HillInc. 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Chaturvedi M.C., “Water Resources Systems Planning and Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi,

1997.

2. Goodman Alvin S., “Principles of Water Resources Planning”, Prentice-Hall, 1984

3. Maass et al, “Design of Water Resources Systems”, Macmillan, 1968.

137

15CEC26 DESIGN OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ELEMENTS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basic concepts of prestressing.

To get familiar with the design principles of prestressed concrete.

To get exposed to design of prestressed concrete tanks and pipes.

To have good knowledge on analysis of composite members.

To acquire knowledge on design of prestressed concrete bridges.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply basic fundamentals of prestressing.

Design prestressed concrete flexural members.

Design prestressed concrete tanks and pipes.

Analyze composite members.

Design prestressed concrete bridges.


Knowledge on Reinforced Concrete Elements

UNITI THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR 9

Basic concepts – advantages – materials required – systems and methods of prestressing – analysis of sections

– stress concept – strength concept – load balancing concept – effect of loading on the tensile stresses in

tendons – effect of tendon profile on deflections – factors influencing deflections – calculation of deflections –

short term and long term deflections - losses of prestress – estimation of crack width.

UNITII DESIGN CONCEPTS 9

Flexural strength – simplified procedures- codal provision – strain compatibility method – basic concepts in

selection of cross section for bending – stress distribution in end block - design of anchorage zone reinforcement

– limit state design criteria – partial prestressing – applications.

UNITIII CIRCULAR PRESTRESSING 9

Introduction – General features of prestressed concrete tanks –Analysis and Design of prestressed concrete

tanks – Design of cylindrical and non-cylindrical pipe.

UNITIV COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 9

Types - Analysis for stresses –Differential shrinkage - estimate for deflections – flexural and shear strength of

composite members.

UNITV PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9

General aspects –Advantages –pretensionedprestressed concrete bridge decks – Post tensioned prestressed

concrete bridge decks – Principles of design only.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

138

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Krishna Raju N., “Prestressed concrete”, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2012.

2. Pandit.G.S. and Gupta.S.P., "Prestressed Concrete", CBS Publishers and Distributers Pvt. Ltd, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajagopalan, N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Alpha Science, 2002.

2. Dayaratnam.P., "Prestressed Concrete Structures", Oxford and IBH, 2013.

3. Lin T.Y. and Ned.H.Burns, "Design of prestressed Concrete Structures", Third Edition, Wiley India Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. David A.Sheppard, William R. and Philips, “Plant cast precast and prestressed concrete – A design

guide”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1992.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/105106117/

2. http://www.assakkaf.com/ence_454_lecture_notes.htm

3. http://faculty.delhi.edu/hultendc/AECT480-Lecture%2024.pdf

4. http://www.colincaprani.com/structural-engineering/courses/lecture-notes/

CODE BOOKS:

1. IS: 1343 – 1980 Prestressed concrete – Code of Practice

2. IS: 784 - 2001 - IS Specification for Prestressed Concrete Pipes.IS: 6006-1983 Uncoated Stress

relieved Strand for Prestressed concrete

3. IS: 3370 - 1999 - Part IV - IS Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the storage of liquids.

139

CORE ELECTIVES

VIII SEMESTER

15CEC27 INTERIOR DECORATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals related to the interior design.

To provide knowledge on principles of interior design.

To create awareness about the uses of materials in interior design.

To impart knowledge on utilization of furniture in various rooms.

To provide knowledge on various types of staircases.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the concepts of interior design into practice.

Analyse the fundamentals of interior design based on site conditions.

Practice the interior design using locally available materials.

Design the rooms elegantly with various type of furniture styles.

Apply the fundamental concepts in the choice of staircases


Knowledge on Housing Planning and Management

UNIT I ELEMENTS OF INTERIOR DESIGN 9

Drawing instruments-materials used-care and maintenance. Introduction to code of practice - general Interior and

Interior drawings-definitions- construction of plan-elevation- section-Use anthropometrics in interiors.

UNIT II PRINCIPLES OF INTERIOR DESIGN 9

Introduction - basic interiors- elements -principles of design - Color & color scheme –choice and use of colours-

balance-order

UNIT III MATERIALS UTILIZATION IN INTERIOR DESIGN 9

Introduction -properties of materials-Types of ceramic materials-glasses and plywood -their utilization in interior

design.

UNIT IV INTERIOR LAYOUT 9

Space selection - furniture styles - selection of furniture- use of furniture templates-design of furniture -different

purposes– bedrooms- dining hall- kitchen-office space -measurement of drawing as per design.

UNIT V STAIRCASES 9

Materials - plan and design of staircase-details of construction-bricks- stone - R.C.C –mezzinine floor-elegance-

order in choice of staircase

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

140

TEXTBOOKS:

1. PratapR.M,“Interior Design principles and practice”, Standard publishers distribution, Delhi,1988.

2. Faulkner, S.-and Faulkner,R, “Inside Today’s Home”, Rine hart publishing company, Newyork. 1987

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Seetharaman P. “Interior Design And Decoration”, Text books zone,2014.

15CEC28 RISK AND VALUE MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamentals related to the project risks

To provide knowledge on various characteristics of human aspects in the project management

To create awareness about the risk management systems.

To create awareness about the various methods of qualitative risk assessment

To impart knowledge on various value engineering methods.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Forecast the factors affecting the project risks.

Apply the various human aspects of the projects.

Assess the risk management system

Apply the various methods of qualitative risk assessment.

Evaluate the building using the fundamentals of the value engineering


Knowledge on Project Management

UNIT I PROJECT RISKS 9

Definition, dynamic and static risk, uncertainty and risk, Risk and construction project time, money and

technology, the people and the risks, processes and risks, risks and clients, consultants and contractors, risk

allocation in contracting.

UNIT II HUMAN ASPECTS 9

Personnel attitude towards risk, perceptions and risks, individuals and groups, communication in risk

management, concept of utility and risks.

UNIT III RISK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Risk identification, sources of risks, risk classification, types, impact and consequences of risk, risk analysis,

Sensitivity analysis, breakeven analysis ,scenario analysis, risk response: retention, reduction, transfer,

avoidance

141

UNIT IV QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN RISK

MANAGEMENT

9

Qualitative risk assessment, risk register, probability – Impact matrix, project appraisal, cost benefit analysis,

Monte- Carlo technique, portfolio theory, Delphi method, influence diagrams, decision trees.

UNIT V VALUE ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT 9

Value, Reasons of poor value in constructed facilities, habits, road blocks and attitudes.-job plan, function

analysis, purpose and implications of life cycle costs, Impact of energy on cost of constructed facilities, managing

value engineering study.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Michael F. Dallas, “Value and Risk Management: A Guide to Best Practice” WB; 1 edition,2011.

2. John Kelly, Steven Male& Drummond Graham, “Value Management of Construction Projects”, Wiley-

Blackwell; 2nd Edition, 2014

3. Simon A. Burtonshaw-Gunn, “Risk and Financial Management in Construction” Gower, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J. Jerry Kaufman, “Value Management: Creating Competitive Advantage” Sakura House Publishing,

2009.

2. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, “Value Engineering Mastermind: From Concept to Value Engineering

Certification”, SAGE Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2009.

15CEC29 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the effects of poor waste management and types of solid waste

To Identify the components of a waste collection system

To recognize the collection system for waste management

To realize the ideas/ways involving in the processing of solid waste

To know the impact of waste processing various options for disposal of wastes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Classify solid wastes explain the functional elements of SWM and determine the effects of poor waste

management on public health and the environment.

Discuss the various components of a waste collection system and to explain the characteristics of waste

containers relative to their use.

Evaluate how a collection system is planned , implemented and maintain the required data for record

keeping and inventory control.

Identify the purpose of waste processing and explain the processing techniques for reducing the volume

and size of wastes.

http://www.amazon.co.uk/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=Michael+F.+Dallas&search-alias=books-uk&field-author=Michael+F.+Dallas&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.co.uk/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=John+Kelly&search-alias=books-uk&field-author=John+Kelly&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.co.uk/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&text=Steven+Male&search-alias=books-uk&field-author=Steven+Male&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.co.uk/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_3?ie=UTF8&text=Drummond+Graham&search-alias=books-uk&field-author=Drummond+Graham&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.co.uk/Simon-A.-Burtonshaw-Gunn/e/B001JSFF98/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=J.+Jerry+Kaufman&search-alias=books&field-author=J.+Jerry+Kaufman&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/Anil-Kumar-Mukhopadhyaya/e/B0026GSSW8/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

142

Evaluate the various options for disposal of wastes and their selection criteria.


Knowledge on basics of waste management

UNIT I SOURCES AND TYPES OF MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTES 9

Sources and types of solid wastes - Quantity – factors affecting generation of solid wastes - Characteristics –

methods of sampling and characterization; Effects of improper disposal of solid wastes – public health effects.

Principle of solid waste management – social & economic aspects; Public awareness; Role of NGOs; Legislation.

UNIT II ON-SITE STORAGE & PROCESSING 9

On-site storage methods – materials used for containers – on-site segregation of solid wastes –public health &

economic aspects of storage – options under Indian conditions – Critical Evaluation of Options.

UNIT III COLLECTION AND TRANSFER 9

Methods of Collection – types of vehicles – Manpower requirement – collection routes; transfer stations –

selection of location, operation & maintenance; options under Indian conditions.

UNIT IV OFF-SITE PROCESSING 9

Processing techniques and Equipment; Resource recovery from solid wastes – composting,

Incineration, Pyrolysis - options under Indian conditions.

UNIT V DISPOSAL 9

Dumping of solid waste; sanitary landfills – site selection, design and operation of sanitary - Landfills – Leachate

collection j& treatment

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. George Tchobanoglous et.al, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 1993.

2. B.Bilitewski, G.HardHe, K.Marek, A.Weissbach, and H.Boeddicker, “Waste Management”, Springer, 1994.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,

Government of India, New Delhi, 2000

2. R.E.Landreth and P.A.Rebers, “Municipal Solid Wastes – problems and Solutions”, Lewis Publishers, 1997.

3. Bhide A.D. and Sundaresan, B.B., “Solid Waste Management in Developing Countries”, INSDOC, 1993.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.w3schools.in/

2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/

143

15CEC30 TRAFFIC PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals related to the traffic flow.

To provide knowledge on traffic signals and its operation.

To create awareness about the control measures for traffic flow and fundamentals of traffic engineering.

To impart knowledge on accident risk and its’ management

To provide knowledge on Traffic management measures.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyse the various types of traffic flow.

Plan and design the traffic signal duration.

Practice the traffic engineering and practice the control measures.

Analyse the causes and report the accident.

Manage the traffic congestion using the available management measures.



UNIT I THEORY OF TRAFFIC FLOW 9

cope - definitions - basic relationship- flow-density- capacity. Speed studies- car following theory and its

application to traffic engineering - probabilistic description of traffic flow-introduction to queuing theory- traffic flow

problems for steady state conditions-simulation -tools.

UNIT II TRAFFIC SIGNALS 9

Traffic signals- types- advantages - optimal cycle time - signal setting for an intersection-fixed time signals. co-

ordination of signals- types- area traffic control - delay at signalized intersection.

UNIT III TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND CONTROL 9

Review of various traffic surveys - traffic Studies-statistical methods - traffic engineering and their applications –

distributions - sampling theory - significance testing - regression and correlation- intersection design-principles -

various available alternatives - rotary design – roundabouts

UNIT IV ACCIDENTS AND ROAD SAFETY 9

Accident – causes - reporting system - types of accidents - recording system- analysis and preventive

measures. accident cost - alternative methodologies for calculation – modeling – collision diagram-road safety-

road users -awareness- road users cost.

UNIT V TRAFFIC SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 9

Traffic system management -various measures – scope - relative merits and demerits. Highway capacity -

passenger car units (PCU) - level of service - factor affecting capacity -level of service- influence of mixed traffic.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

144

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dr. L.R.Kadiyali, “Traffic engineering and transport planning ”,Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 8th Edition ,2014.

2. SubhashSaxena, “A Course in Traffic Engineering and Design”, DhanpatRai& Sons,2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. G.J. Pingnataro, “Principles of Traffic Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 1970.

2. Wohl and Martin, “Traffic System Analysis for Engineering and Planners”, McGraw Hill, 1983.

15CEC31 ELEMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the planning and classification of various industries.

To analyse the functional requirements of industrial structures.

To get accustomed to the design of steel structures in various industries.

To get exposed to the design of industrial RC structures.

To explore the design of Power Transmission line structures

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Evaluate the planning requirements for industries

Sort out functional requirements for industries

Execute the design of industrial steel structures

Design industrial structures with RCC

Workout the design of Power Transmission Structures


Knowledge on RCC and Steel Elements

UNIT I PLANNING 9

Classification of Industries and Industrial structures –General requirements for industries like cement, chemical and

steel plants – Planning and layout of buildings and components

UNIT II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT 9

Lighting – Ventilation – Accounts – Fire safety – Guidelines from factories act.

UNIT III DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES 9

Industrial roofs – Crane girders - Design of Bunkers and Silos

UNIT IV DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES 9

Silos and bunkers – Chimneys – Principles of folded plates and shell roofs

UNIT V POWER TRANSMISSION STRUCTURE 9

Towers - Tower foundation - Classification and types of foundation - Testing of towers - Loads of transmission line

towers - Foundation of TL towers Forces - on tower foundation - Types of substation - Power cables and control

cables

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

145

TEXT BOOKS:

1. KrishnaRaju. N “Structural Design and Drawing: Reinforced Concrete and Steel”, University Press (India) Pvt

Limited, 2004.

2. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain, “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete “, 2007

REFERENCES

1. Henn W. Buildings for Industry, vols.I and II, London Hill Books, 1995

2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, SP32 – 1986, Bureau of Indian Standards, New

Delhi 1990

3. Course Notes on Modern Developments in the Design and Construction of Industrial Structures, Structural

Engineering Research Centre, Madras, 1982

4. Duggal, “Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.

5. ShanthaKumarA.R., “Transmission line structures”, Tata McGraw-HillEducation, 2010

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Water Henn, “ Buildings for industry”, John Wiley and Sons. 1998

2. Glover, “ StructuralPre cast Concrete”, Tata McGraw Hill. 1997

3. Dunham, “Planning of industrial structures”, Tata McGraw Hill2002

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101040/download/Lec-33.pdf

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106113/2_industrial_building/1_introduction.pdf

3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106113/7_transmission_towers/4_tower_design.pdf

CODE BOOKS:

1. IS:802 - Part III - 1978, Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line tower ,BIS, New

Delhi.

2. IS:4091-1979, Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for transmission line towers and poles,

BIS, New Delhi.

3. IS:6533 – Part II- 1989, Indian standard code of practice for design and construction of steel Chimney, BIS, New

Delhi.

4. IS:6332 - 1984, Code of practice for construction of floors and roofs using precast double curved shell units, BIS,

New Delhi

5. IS:2204 - 1962, Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof, BIS, New Delhi

6. SP32 – 1986 Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, BIS, New Delhi

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101040/download/Lec-33.pdf

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106113/2_industrial_building/1_introduction.pdf

146

ALLIED ELECTIVES – SYLLABUS

Offered by EEE Department

15EEA01 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on

Measurement of force, torque and speed.

Measurement of industrial parameters like acceleration, Vibration and density.

Monitoring techniques for pressure in industrial process.

Advanced techniques for temperature and high temperature measurement.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze Instrumentation systems and explain their applications to various industries.

Measure the changes in pressure, temperature in an industry.

COURSE PREREQUISITES:

Basics of measurements standards – Instrumentation system – Basic knowledge on industrial process.

UNIT I CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9

Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring

instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of

measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of

mean) – Standards and calibration.

UNIT II MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9

Accelerometers: - LVDT, Piezoelectric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometers - Seismic

instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain

gauge and Piezoelectric load cells

UNIT III PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9

Units of pressure – Manometers and their types,-McLeod Gauge-Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube,

bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal

conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges. Dead weight tester.

UNIT IV LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9

Definitions and standards - Primary and secondary fixed points - Calibration of thermometers - Different types of

filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers - RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning-3 lead

and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors.

UNIT V HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9

Thermocouples - Laws of thermocouple - Fabrication of industrial thermocouples – Compensating cable- Signal

conditioning for thermocouple - Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total

radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

147

TEXTBOOKS:

2. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2007.

3. Jones. B.E, "Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.

4. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and

Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005

2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

3. Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.

4. S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.

5. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.

15EEA02 ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart in-depth knowledge on illumination and requirements of energy efficient lighting.

To make the students familiar with measurement of illumination.

To make the students design a lighting scheme.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course, students will be able to

Explicate the different types of lighting schemes.

Elucidate the measurement of light.

Explain the working of different lamps.

Demonstrate the ability to design illumination systems for desired specifications.

Demonstrate the awareness of impact of energy conservation approach to illumination systems.


Basics of Electrical Engineering, awareness about artificial lighting, Energy Conservation, Algebra, Trigonometry.

UNIT I LIGHTING FUNDAMENTALS 9

Nature of light – Importance of lighting – sensitivity of eye – colour sensation – Quantum theory of light – Terms

used in illumination – Polar Curve – Laws of illumination – Illumination at a point – Types of reflection – Types of

lighting schemes – Requirements of good lighting – Stroboscopic effect – Factory lighting – Flood lighting –

Street lighting.

UNIT II PHOTOMETRY 9

Grease Spot Photometer Head – Lummer - Brodhun Photometer Head – Flicker Photometer – Measurement of

MSCP by Integrating Sphere – Photovoltaic cell – Distribution photometry – Illumination Photometer.

148

UNIT III LAMPS AND FITTINGS 9

Filament lamps – Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps – Halogen

lamps – Neon lamps – Induction lamps – Emergency Lamps – lighting for displays and signaling – neon signs,

Lamp fittings – Symmetrical fittings, Asymmetrical fittings.

UNIT IV LIGHTING DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS 9

Basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street lighting, and sports ground. Selection of

lamps – Calculation of wattage, number and arrangement of lamps – Space height ratio – Calculation of

illumination level available.

UNIT V ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9

Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of

CFL – Cold Cathode CFL, LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements –

Benefits of LED lighting – CFL Vs LED lighting, 12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance –

Constraints in 12V DC wiring – Voltage Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Joseph B. Murdoch, "Illumination Engineering from Edison's Lamp to the Laser, second edition, Visions

Comm., 1994.

2. Jack L. Lindsey, "Applied Illumination Engineering" The Fairmont Press Inc., 1991.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ronald N. Helms, M. Clay Beicher, "Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous Environments", Prentice

Hall, 1991.

2. Marc Schiler, "Simplified Design of Building Lighting" John Wiley and Sons, 1992.

3. IES Lighting Handbook, 8th edition, 1993.

4. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.

Ltd, Third Edition 2015.

5. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition

2015.

6. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.

7. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,

Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://energy.gov/energysaver/articles/induction-lighting-old-lighting-technology-made-new-again

2. http://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/18718/title/led-vs-induction-lighting/viewall/true.aspx

3. http://www.edisontechcenter.org/InductionLamps.html

4. http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm

5. http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php

149

6. http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-

volt-dc.html

7. https://www.nelt.co.jp/english/products/ccfl/about.html

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.

Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.

Operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.

Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic

reduction methods.

Operation of AC voltage controllers

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.

Design a suitable DC power supply for given load specification from AC or DC supply.

Design and analyze the single or three phase inverter.

Analyze the AC voltage controller


Semiconductor physics, Steady state operation of single phase AC circuits, Differentiation, Integration and

Fourier series

UNIT I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching

characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT-SCR: Two Transistor model, turn on circuits and

commutation circuits

UNIT II PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9

1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average

load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current

UNIT III DC TO DC CONVERTER 9

Step-down and step-up chopper - Time ratio control and current limit control – Buck, boost, buck-boost

converter-Isolated Converters: Fly back and Forward converter

UNIT IV INVERTERS 9

Single phase and three phase inverters (both 1200

mode and 1800 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple,

sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM – Voltage and harmonic control

UNIT V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9

Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load

voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - Single phase cycloconverter

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

15EEA03 SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS

150

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4th

Edition, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,” Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design”, John Wiley &

Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003

2. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science &

Business Media, 2nd

edition 2001.

15EEA04 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C 3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Power generation through various methods.

Importance of measuring devices in power plant.

Boiler control techniques and turbine control techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate the measurement of various power plant parameters.

Implement various Control techniques in power generation process.


Basics of Measurements & instrumentation – Power plant working concepts - Knowledge on power plant

parameters controls – Fundamentals of control system .

UNIT I MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - I 9

Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. Measurement of water purity- Measurement of

dissolved oxygen in feed water- Measurement of PH value of water- Measurement of O2,CO2, and CO content in

the gases - Measurement of Smoke and Dust- Dosimeters.

UNIT II MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - II 9

Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow – Drum level measurement – Steam pressure

and temperature measurement – Turbine speed and vibration measurement.

UNIT III BOILER CONTROL 9

Combustion of fuel and excess air – Firing rate demand – Steam temperature control – Drum level control –

Single, two and three element control – Furnace draft control– flue gas dew point control.

UNIT IV BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Burners for liquid and solid fuels – Burner management – Furnace safety interlocks – Coal pulverizer control –

Combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers – air/fuel ratio control.

UNIT V CONTROL OF TURBINE 9

Types of steam turbines – impulse and reaction turbines – compounding – Turbine governing system – Speed

and Load control- Basics of Automatic Load Frequency Control- Free Governor Mode of Operation (FGMO) -

Restricted Governor Mode of Operation (RGMO).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

151

TEXTBOOKS:

1. S.C.Arora,S. Domkundwar,” Power plant Engineering”Dhanpat Rai &Co (P)Ltd,2015.

2. Sam Dukelow, “Control of Boilers”, Instrument Society of America, 2009.

3. Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, “Steam Plant Operation”,9th Edition

McGraw Hill, 2012.

4. Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Chilton Book Company, 2005.

2. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.

3. P.K.Nag, “Powerplant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.

4. Tamilmani, “Power plant instrumentation”, Sams Publishers, 2011.

5. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New

Delhi, 2011.

15EEA05 ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their performance.

The different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.

Conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate the concepts and different types of electrical machines.

Deliver the impact of starting D.C motors and induction motors.

Explain about conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.


Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO D.C. MACHINES 9

DC Machine – Construction – DC generator - Principle of operation – EMF equation – Self and separately excited

generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators. DC motor–Principle of operation – Back

emf and torque equation – characteristics - applications.

UNIT II A.C. MACHINES 9

Alternators – Construction – Types – Induced EMF – Voltage regulation – EMF and MMF methods. Three-phase

induction motors – Construction – Types – Principle of operation – slip-torque characteristics. Single-phase

induction motors – Construction–Types– Principle of operation.

152

UNIT III STARTING METHODS 9

Types of D.C Motor starters – Two point, three point and four point starter. Types of A.C Motor starters – DOL,

Auto transformer, Star-Delta and Rotor Resistance starter.

UNIT IV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C.

DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)

9

Speed control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward- Leonard control system - Using

controlled rectifiers and DC choppers(Circuit diagram and operation) –applications.

UNIT V CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL

OF A.C. DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)

9

Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/f control, slip power recovery scheme – Using

inverters and AC voltage regulators (Circuit diagram and operation)– applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. A K Theraja & B L Theraja “A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-2,” 23rd

Edition S.Chand

Publications, 2007.

2. Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition, 2015.

.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. P.C.Sen.,“Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics”, Second Edition ,Wiley India Pvt.

Lt&Sons. 2013.

2. K. Murugesh Kumar, “Electric Machines”, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.

3. M.D.Singh, K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

4. Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,

2010.

5. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines” ,Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The architecture and programming of ARM processor.

The embedded computing platform design and analysis.

The basic concepts of real time Operating system.

The fundamentals of filters.

The system design techniques and networks for embedded systems

153

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor..

Explain the basic concepts of real time Operating system design.

Use the system design techniques to develop software for embedded systems.

Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts.


Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM

PROCESSORS

9

Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design example: Model train

controller- Instruction sets preliminaries – ARM Processor – CPU: programming input and output- supervisor

mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power

consumption.

UNIT II EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS 9

CPU buses – Memory devices – I/O devices – Component interfacing – Design with microprocessors –

Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs – Assembly and Linking – Basic

compilation techniques – Analysis and optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size – Program

validation and testing.

UNIT III PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9

Multiple tasks and multi processes – Processes – Context Switching – Operating Systems –Scheduling policies -

Multiprocessor – Inter Process Communication mechanisms – Evaluating operating system performance – Power

optimization strategies for processes.

UNIT IV SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND NETWORKS 9

Design methodologies- Design flows – Requirement Analysis – Specifications-System analysis and architecture

design – Quality Assurance techniques- Distributed embedded systems – MPSoCs and shared memory

multiprocessors.

UNIT V CASE STUDY 9

Data compressor – Alarm Clock – Audio player – Software modem-Digital still camera – Telephone answering

machine-Engine control unit – Video accelerator.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”, Morgan

Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.

2. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components – Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Third

Edition “Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third Edition Cengage Learning, 2012.

2. David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2007.

3. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to Networking with C/C++”, Prentice Hall, 1999.

4. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997

5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, Dream Tech Press, 2005.

6. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.

154

15EEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC POWER UTILIZATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Different types of lamps

Methods of heating and welding

Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Electrolytic processes and storage of electricity

Electric traction systems

Electrical energy conservation

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and the various types of electric heating, electric welding

and design a heating element

Explain the working principle of refrigerators and Air Conditioning System

Explain about electrolytic processes and storage of electricity

Explain about electric traction.

Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic

aspects of utilising electrical energy


Basics of Electrical Engineering, Effects of electric current, Chemical reactions in electrolyte, awareness

about artificial lighting, refrigeration and air conditioning, Characteristics and application of different electric

motors, awareness about traction, Algebra, Trigonometry.

UNIT I ILLUMINATION, INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9

Different types of lamps - incandescent – fluorescent – mercury vapour lamps.

Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating – dielectric heating -

electric arc furnaces.

Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.

UNIT II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9

Principle of a refrigerator – Vapour Compression System – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Voltage Regulator

– Water Cooler – Coefficient of Performance – Standard rating – Maintenance and trouble shooting of

refrigerators – Air conditioning system – Types – operation – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Cooling

capacity – Thermo-electric Refrigeration – Central Air Conditioning System.

UNIT III ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES AND STORAGE OF ELECTRICITY 9

Electrolysis, Faraday’s laws of Electrolysis – Electroplating – Electrical Equipments – Agitation and Filtration

Plant – Extraction and refining of metals – Storage of Electricity – Lead Acid Battery – Characteristics –

Indications of a fully charged battery – Nickel iron and Nickel cadmium batteries – Applications –Capacity rating

of batteries – Charging and maintenance of batteries – Battery chargers.

UNIT IV ELECTRIC TRACTION 9

Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – traction motors – d.c.

series motor – mechanics of train movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption.

155

UNIT V ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY UTILISATION 9

Introduction to Energy conservation and Energy auditing - Tools for Energy auditing – Energy conservation in

Chemical industry, Pulp and Paper industry, Sugar industry, Cement industry, Textile industry, Iron and Steel

Industry – Energy Conservation in household and commercial sectors – Energy Conservation Legislation –

Tariffs - Influence of power factor – The most economic power factor - PF improvement.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.

Ltd, Third Edition 2015.

2. E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh

Edition 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third

Edition 2014.

2. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition

2015.

3. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.

4. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,

Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.

5. N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power : Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New

Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.

6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Basic Electrical Engineering’, S.Chand Limited, 2008.

15EEA08 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.

To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization

techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.

Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.

Design Genetic Algorithms system through case study.


Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential

Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.

156


Approaches to intelligent control – Architecture for intelligent control – Symbolic reasoning system – rule-based

systems – the AI approach – Knowledge representation – Expert systems.

UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple

perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural

network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.

UNIT III GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION

TECHNIQUE

9

Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of

GA parameters – Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.

UNIT IV FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9

Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to

fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule

bases.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9

Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems – GA applications to engineering optimisation problems

– Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.

2. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach

to Learning and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.

2. Klir G.J., Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.

3. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.

4. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., “Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Narosa Publishers, 2001.

5. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison Wesley,

1989.

6. Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.

7. Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,

1985.

8. Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.

Ltd., First Edition, 2003.

9. Donald A. Waterman, “A Guide to Expert Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.

157

15EEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER QUALITY

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Various Power Quality issues.

Power quality problems and methods of control.

Various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the various power quality issues.

Analyze the power quality events and assessment.

Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.



UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9

Terms and definitions: Overloading, under voltage, sustained interruption; sags and swells; waveform distortion,

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.

UNIT II VOLTAGE SAGS ANDSWELLS 9

Sources of sags and interruptions, estimating voltage sag performance, motor starting sags, estimating the sag

severity, fast transfer switches- Sources of over voltages: Capacitor switching, lightning, ferro-resonance;

mitigation of voltage swells

UNIT III HARMONICS 9

Harmonic distortion: Voltage and current distortion, THD-TDD, harmonic sources from commercial and industrial

loads, locating harmonic sources- resonance-harmonic distortion evaluation, devices for controlling harmonic

distortion, passive filters, active filters

UNIT IV Power Quality Benchmarking 9

Benchmarking Process-RMS voltage variation Indices-Harmonic Indices-Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality

Insurance

UNIT V POWER QUALITY MONITORING 9

Monitoring consideration-Power quality measurement equipment: harmonic / spectrum analyzer, flicker meters,

disturbance analyzer- applications of expert system for power quality monitoring.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems

Quality”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.

2. Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York:

IEEE press, 2000).

158

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.

2. Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer International

Edition, 2002

3. PSCAD User Manual.

4. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.

15EEA10 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments

Different wiring methods

Estimation for electrical wiring

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Address Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments

Explain about different wiring methods

Estimate for a wiring system




Electrical supply system-Three-phase four wire distribution system-Types of domestic loads-Protection against

Electric shock-Earthing- Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Fuse-Miniature Circuit Breaker – Residual

Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker-General requirements of Electrical Installations

UNIT II TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9

Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,

Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,

60,61 – Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,

main switch board, sub-distribution boards

UNIT III DESIGN OF SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 9

System of Connection of Appliances and accessories-Schematic diagram and Wiring diagram of Light and Fan

circuits-Wiring diagram of a single tube light controlled by a switch-Alarm circuits without relays-Alarm circuits

with relays

UNIT IV ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9

Introduction -Purpose of Estimating and Costing-Qualities of a good Estimator-Essential Elements of Estimating

and Costing-Tender-Guidelines for Inviting Tenders-Quotation-Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing

UNIT V DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9

Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for

a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of

159

commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour

requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:

Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 6th

Edition, 2011

2. Giridharan M.K., “ Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011

3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age International Pvt.

Ltd., Publishers, 1991.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 9th

Edition, 2012

Offered by ECE Department

15ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.

To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.

To introduce source and Error control coding.

To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course students will be able to

Apply analog and digital communication techniques.

Apply data and pulse communication techniques.

Analyze Source and Error control coding.

Utilize multi–user radio communication.


Basic knowledge of Bessels function, Time domain and frequency domain signals representation, Basicelectronic circuits,

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9

Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index

and percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM

waveforms – phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency

analysis of angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.

UNIT II DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9

Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter – BW

consideration of FSK – FSK receiver – phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – QPSK – Quadrature

Amplitude modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.

160

UNIT III DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION 9

Data Communication:History of Data Communication – Standards Organizations for Data Communication –

Data Communication Circuits – Data Communication Codes – Error Detection and Correction Techniques –

Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel interfaces.

Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code

Modulation (PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).

UNIT IV SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9

Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel

capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.

UNIT V MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION 9

Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code division

multiple access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off –

Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4th

Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.

2. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

3. B.Sklar,”Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications” 2nd

Edition PearsonEducation, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html

2. http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html

3. http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf

4. https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf

5. http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf

6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf

7. www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt

15ECA02 MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming of 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Write assembly language program for 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

161

Interface peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

Design 8085 and 8086 microprocessor based system.


Digital logic circuits, binary and other number systems, electronic circuits, memory and interfacing concepts,

UNIT I 8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9

Microprocessor based system blocks – Number system – Address bus – data bus – control bus – Tristate bus –

Data Transfer Scheme – 8085 Microprocessor Architecture – Instruction set – Assembly Language Programming

– Interrupts

UNIT II 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9

Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – signals– Minimum mode and Maximum mode operation and bus cycles –

Interrupts – Interrupt Service Routines – Memory Interfacing

UNIT III 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE

PROGRAMMING

9

Programmer’s model of 8086 – operand types – operand addressing – assembler directives,instruction set –

Data transfer group – Arithmetic group – logical group – Flag manipulation group – control transfergroup –

Shift/rotate group – Machine or processor control group – 8086 Assembly Languageprogramming.

UNIT IV MICROPROCESSOR PERIPHERAL CHIP INTERFACING 9

Introduction to I/O Ports – Architecture and interfacing of Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) – Serial

Communication (8251) – Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254) – Keyboard and Display Controller

(8279)

UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS 9

Switches and LEDs – Seven–segment Displays – D to A converter – A to D converter – Relay, Motor Control –

DC & Stepper Motor – Case studies – Microprocessor based Digital Scale system – Temperature controller –

Traffic Light control

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture – Programming and application with 8085”, 4th

Edition,Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000.

2. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” TMH, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing”, Pearson Prentice Hall,

2009.

2. M. Rafi Quazzaman, “Microprocessors Theory and Applications” Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India,

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.

3. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw–Hill Education,

2013.

4. Sunil Mathur, “Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.

2011.

162

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod1/M1L3.pdf

3. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/106108100/

15ECA03 MATLAB PROGRAMMING L T P C

2 0 2 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.

To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and Debugging methods.

Create M–files using IF, SWITCH, FOR, WHILE statements.

Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.


Familiarity with using Windows applications, calculus, Boolean laws, probability,arrays and vectors, use of a

scientific calculator,

UNIT I MATLAB CONCEPTS 6+3

Directory and Defined Path – Menus and the toolbar – Saving & Loading Files – Using the command line to call

functions – Computing with MATLAB – Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat

file, MATLAB Help System.

Lab Component: Get and Set values – Numerical computations

UNIT II DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION 6+3

Rational Operators on Single Values – Boolean Operators on Single Values – MATLAB functions to manipulate

complex values – Arrays and Matrices – Declaring a vector – Dot product – Cross Product.

Lab Component: Matrix generators – Data conversion & Data Normalization.

UNIT III GRAPHICS 6+3

2D Graphics: XY– plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots – Special Plot types, Bar, Grid, Legend,

Lineseries properties, Semilogx, Regression – 3D Graphics – Mesh – Contour – Developing GUI.

Lab Component: Multiple data sets in one plot – Setting x and y axis limits to match the actual range of the

data using xlim and ylim.

UNIT IV m FILE PROGRAMMING 6+3

m-files– syntax guidelines – Nested functions – Placing comments – Control Flow: IF statement, SWITCH

statement, FOR statement, WHILE statement – Program Flow: Arithmetic errors – Indexing errors, Assignment

errors, Struct array errors.

Lab Component: Histogram – Interpolation – Break and Continue – Fibonacci series

UNIT V MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS 6+3

Operations – Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special

Matrices– Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Cofactor, minor

Lab Component: Differential equation solver – factorial finding – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.

L : 30 ; P : 15 ; TOTAL:45 Periods

163

TEXTBOOK:

1. Linda Coulson, “MATLAB Programming”, Global Media, Delhi,2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. William J. Palm III,” Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, 2005.

2. G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan,” Matrix Computations”, 3rd

Editon, Johns Hopkins University

Press,1996.

3. Stephen J. Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 4th

Edition ThomsonLearning,2007

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html

2. http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res–18–002–introduction–to–matlab–spring–2008/

15ECA04 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the working principles of various types of antenna.

To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.

To know various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the properties and parameters of antenna

Analyze the operation of different antennas

Design antenna array systems


electromagnetic field theory, analog electronics, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic wave propagation,

polarization

UNIT I ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS 9

Review of electromagnetic theory: Vector potential – Solution of wave equation – retarded vector and scalar

potential –Hertzian dipole. Antenna characteristics: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input

impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity – Equivalence of Radiation patterns – Equivalence

of Impedances – Effective aperture – Effective length – Antenna temperature.

UNIT II WIRE ANTENNAS 9

EM radiation and working of Short dipole – Radiation resistance and Directivity – Half wave Dipole – Monopole –

Small loop antennas.

UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS 9

Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication – Two–element Array – Uniform Array – Polynomial representation –

Array with non–uniform Excitation – Binomial Array.

164

UNIT IV APERTURE ANTENNAS 9

Magnetic Current and its fields – Uniqueness theorem – Field equivalence principle – Duality principle –

Method of Images – Pattern properties – Slot antenna, Horn Antenna – Pyramidal Horn Antenna – Reflector

Antenna –Flat reflector – Corner Reflector

UNIT V SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS 9

Long wire – V and Rhombic Antenna –Yagi–Uda Antenna – Turnstile Antenna – Helical Antenna – Axial mode

helix, Normal mode helix –Biconical Antenna – Log periodic Dipole Array – Spiral Antenna –Microstrip Patch

Antennas.

Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern measurement – Gain and Directivity Measurements – Impedance

measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all Applications”, 3rd

Edition, Tata

McGraw–Hill Book Company, 2012.

2. Constantine A. Balanis,”Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 2nd

Edition, John Wiley, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems”, Pearson Education / PHI,

2006

2. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and Wave propagation”, Oxford University Press, 2007.

3. G.S.N.Raju, “Antenna Wave Propagation”, Pearson Education, 2004.

4. R.E.Collins, “Antenna and Radiowave propagation”,McGraw–Hill, 1985

5. W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna analysis and design”, John Wiley, 2000.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate–508171–wave–propagation/

2. http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12–6–07.ppt

3. http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt

4. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest125391–1319926–unit–antenna–engineering/

15ECA05 TELEVISION ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes, Television Camera tubes and

Composite Video Signal details

To understand principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.

To study PAL Color Television system operation.

165

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyse the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards

Analyse the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications.

Apply the knowledge gained in digital video and television transmission.


Electromagnetic spectrum, electromagnetic wave propagation, basic modulation theory, transducers, electronic

circuits, signals representation.

UNIT I TELEVISION SIGNALS COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL 9

Audio and video transmission – scanning principle – TV broadcasting, system – Aspect ratio – Resolution –

Video bandwidth. Video signals – composite video signal – blanking signal – horizontal, vertical blanking and

sync pulses.

UNIT II TELEVISION CAMERAS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 9

Image orthicon –Vidicon–plumbicon– characteristics of camera tubes –video processing of camera pickup signal

–Picture signal transmission – positive and negative modulation – VSB transmission – Sound signal transmission

– Standard channel bandwidth

UNIT III TV TRANSMITTER & RECEIVER 9

TV standards – TV transmitter – Block diagram of TV Reciever – Receiver controls – RF tuners – Video

channel and picture tube – AGC and synchronization circuits – Deflection circuit (Horizontal and vertical ) –

video detector – Sound section

UNIT IV COLOUR TV PRINCIPLES 9

Compatibility –colour fundamentals – chromaticity diagram –colour picture tubes (Delta – gun, P.I.L &trintron) –

purity and convergence. Colour Signal Transmission and Reception – modulation of colour difference signals –

formation of chrominance signal – NTSC, PAL and SECAM colour systems.

UNIT V DIGITAL TV SYSTEMS 9

Cable TV – Cable Signal Sources – Cable Signal Processing, Distribution & Scrambling – DVB – Video

Recording – Video Disc recording and playback – Digital television –Transmission and reception –Projection

television – Flat panel display TV receivers – Digital TV – LCD and Plasma screen receivers – LEDTV – 3DTV

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXTBOOKS:

1. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing” , 3rd

Edition, New Age

International (P) Publishers, 2006

2. R.R.Gulati,”Monochrome & Color Television,” New Age International Publisher, 2003.

3. Bernard Grob, Charles Herndon, “Basic television and video systems” , McGraw–Hill, 1998

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2nd

Edition, TMH, 2003.

2. R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice,” 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw–Hill, New York, 1997.

166

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://seminarprojects.net/q/principles–of–television–engineering–ppt \

2. www.focalpress.com/

3. www.hobbyprojects.com

15ECA06 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize the principles of Remote Sensing

To gain fundamental knowledge on the physics of remote sensing

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the Electromagnetic Radiation principles for Remote Sensing Applications

Analyse various imaging systems

Interpret Multispectral and Hyperspectral data for Land cover/ Land use studies

Classify the data for application specific analysis


fundamental principles of electromagnetic wave propagation and scattering, Optics, satellite communication

fundamentals, basics of communication engineering

UNIT I PHYSICS OF REMOTE SENSING 9

Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Physics of Remote Sensing – Effects of Atmosphere – Scattering – Different types

–Absorption – Atmospheric window – Energy interaction with surface features – Spectral reflectance of

vegetation, soil ,and water –atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns.

UNIT II REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS 9

Satellites and orbits – Polar orbiting satellites – Spectral – radiometric and spatial resolutions – Temporal

resolution of satellites – Multispectral – thermal and hyperspectral Sensing. Remote Sensing platforms –

airborne and space borne sensors. Some remote sensing satellites, Radars and their features.

UNIT III IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR REMOTE SENSING 9

Geometric corrections – Co–registration of Data – Ground Control Points (GCP) – Atmospheric corrections –

Solar illumination corrections. Image Enhancement: Concept of color – Color composites – Contrast stretching –

linear and non–linear stretching – Filtering techniques – Edge enhancement – Density slicing –Thresholding –

Intensity–Hue–Saturation (IHS) images – Time composite images – Synergetic images.

UNIT IV INFORMATION EXTRACTION FROM REMOTE SENSED DATA 9

Multispectral classification – Ground truth collection – Supervised and unsupervised classification – Change

detection analysis – Principal component analysis – Ratio images – Vegetation indices. Introduction to Image

Processing Softwares: MATLAB – Introduction to Multispectral classification algorithms.

UNIT V REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS 9

Watershed management – Rainfall–runoff modeling – Irrigation management – Flood mapping – Drought

assessment –Environmental monitoring.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

167

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer R.W., “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6th

Edition, John Wiley

&Sons, 2000.

2. Jensen, J.R., “Remote sensing of the environment”, 2nd

Edition,Prentice Hall, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John A.Richards, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”, Springer,1999.

2. John R.Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”, 2nd

Edition,

Prentice Hall, 1995.

3. Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS, 1995.

4. Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to the Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing”,

Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.

5. Sabins, F.F.Jr,” Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation”, W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.itc.nl/~bakker/rs.html

2. rst.gsfc.nasa.gov

3. www.isprs.org

4. www.nrsa.gov.in

15ECA07 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.

To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.

To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the knowledge applications

Develop an embedded product.

Validate the program for system development.


Basics of Assembly Language, C, C++, Python, basic knowledge of electronics, digital electronics, knowledge of

microcontrollers, I/O, analog and digital interfacing, and peripherals.

UNIT I EMBEDDED COMPUTING 9

Embedded system examples – Parts of Embedded System – Processor – Power supply – clock – memory

interface – interrupt – I/O ports – Buffers, Programmable Devices – ASIC – interfacing with memory and I/O

devices – Memory Technologies – EPROM, Flash, OTP, SRAM,DRAM, SDRAM

UNIT II EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Embedded System product Development Life cycle (EDLC) – Hardware development cycles – Specifications –

Component selection – Schematic Design – PCB layout – fabrication and assembly. Product enclosure Design

and Development.

http://www.nrsa.gov.in/

168

UNIT III EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9

Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer.

Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs– Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation

techniques– Program validation and testing.

UNIT IV OPERATING SYSTEMS 9

Concept of firmware – Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and

Threads – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization –

Device Drivers.

UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 9

Design Example: Alarm Clock – Elevator Controller – Ink jet printer– Hardware Design and Software Design –

Set–top Boxes.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “,Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.

2. Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,

3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2nd

Edition, TMH, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001

2. Lyla, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.

3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real – Time Systems”, McGraw – Hill International Editions, 1997

4. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.

5. Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007

6. Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045/

2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-Engineering-Video-lectures-ltv118-Page1.htm

15ECA08 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basic elements of light sources, Wavelength and frequencies of light

To understand the different kind of fibers, losses, and fiber slicing and connectors

To learn different types of photo detectors and its operation

To learn the fiber optical receivers and its measurements

To learn, Optical networks, operational principles of WDM

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the different kinds of light sources and Detectors used in any applications

Design any optical communication system

Analyze the performance measure of the optical parameters

169


Electromagnetic spectrum and its uses, Snells law, optical signal propagation methods and electromagnetic

theory

UNITI OPTICAL SOURCES 9

Light sources : Sunlight, Torch light, LED and Laser light – Optical frequencies and Wavelength – LED internal –

quantum efficiency –Relationship between speed of light, wavelength and frequency – light as an

Electromagnetic waves – comparison of LED and Laser diode

UNITII OPTICAL FIBER 9

Refractive Index –Ray theory of transmission – Total internal reflection – Acceptance angle – Numerical aperture

– Attenuation Fiber Bend losses and Dispersion – Structure of an optical fiber – Optical domain signal –

electrical domain signal Optical pulses for the digital data – Optical fiber connectors – Fiber alignment and Joint

Losses – Fiber Splices – Fiber connectors – Fiber couplers

UNIT III OPTICAL DETECTORS 9

Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes – construction, characteristics and properties –

Comparison of performance, Photo detector noise –Noise sources – Signal to Noise ratio – Detector response

time.

UNITIV FIBER OPTIC RECEIVER AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Fundamental receiver operation – Pre amplifiers – Error sources – Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error –

Quantum limit.

Fiber Attenuation measurements– Dispersion measurements –Optical Spectrum Analyzer–OTDR

UNITV OPTICAL NETWORKS 9

Basic Networks – Broadcast and select Networks – WDM Networks –Bus topology – Star topology –

Wavelength Routed Networks – Routing and wavelength Assignment – Different types of wavelength

Assignment

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication" 5th

Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

2. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Network”, 2nd

Edition, Elsevier, 2004.

3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber–optic communication systems”, 3rd

edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/downloads/Lec19.pdf

2. www.ece466.groups.et.byu.net/notes/notes_source.ppt

170

15ECA09 MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems.

To provide the student with an understanding of advanced multiple access techniques.

To give the student an understanding digital cellular systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After the completion of this course, students will be able to

Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between

mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.

Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile

communication.

Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.)


Radio frequency propagation fundamentals,basics ofdigital communications, basic telephony

UNIT I CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS 9

Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of

cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel

interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–

channel interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and

their effects – diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system

UNIT II CELL COVERAGE, CELL SITE, FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND

HANDOFF

9

Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel

assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting

UNIT III MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND

CORRECTION

9

Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo

coding.

UNIT IV SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES 9

Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division

multiple access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error

considerations – CDMA vs TDMA.

UNIT V SECOND And THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS SYSTEMS 9

GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – LTE.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

171

TEXT BOOKS:

1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.

2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3rd

Edition, IEEE Press,2012.

2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson

Education, 2010.

3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.

4. KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall PTR,

2002

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture%20four%

20channel%20II.pdf.

2. http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.

15ECA10 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems

To discuss the delay models and interconnects in CMOS circuits

To study the HDL fundamentals

Course Outcomes:


Analyze the operation of various CMOS circuits

Apply the techniques for circuit characterization

Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL


Basic electronic devices and circuits, CMOS circuits, integrated circuits

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode – forward and reverse bias characteristics – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Input and Output

characteristics of CE, CB& CC Configuration.

UNIT II FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9

JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics – Pinch off voltage and its significance – MOSFETCharacteristics –

DMOSFET – E MOSFET.

172

UNIT III IC FABRICATION 9

IC classification – fundamental of monolithic IC technology – epitaxial growth, masking and etching – diffusion of

impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging – Fabrication of diodes – capacitance, resistance and

FETs.

UNIT IV MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS 9

Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics – non ideal I–V effects – DC transfer characteristics – Scaling of Devices.

UNIT V HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE 9

Verilog HDL fundamentals – Types of Modeling – HDL for Logic Gates – Half Adder – Full Adder – Half / Full

Subtractor – Comparators.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 3rd

Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2007

2. D.RoyChoudhary, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2nd

Edition, New Age, 2003.

3. N.H.E.Westeetal, “CMOS VLSI Design”,3rd

Edition, Pearson, 2005

4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA– based System Design”, Pearson, 2004

2. Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital – Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.

3. MichealD.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall, 1999.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/e6-195-04.pdf

2. http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf

3. http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits

4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm

Offered by CSE Department

15CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol

To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages

To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).

To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM

To handle the clients’ requests at the server end using PHP

173

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.

Develop website using HTML5

Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS

Validate the users’ data using JavaScript

Access and process various elements of web pages using DOM

Generate dynamic response to client request using PHP

PREREQUISITES:

Programming Principles

UNIT I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9

Types of Network – Reason for Networks – Communication between Computers – Serial and Parallel

Communication – Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication – Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex

Communications – Data Rate, Bandwidth and Throughput – Switched Connections – Topologies used in

Networking – Basic Internet Protocols – The World Wide Web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response

Message – Web Clients – Web Servers

UNIT II HTML5 9

Introduction to HTML5 – Editing HTML5 – W3C HTML validation service – Headings – Linking - Images – Special

characters and horizontal rules – Lists – Tables – Forms – Internal linking - Meta elements – New HTML5 Form

input types – Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute – Page structure elements – Introduction to

Canvas – Canvas Coordinate System – Rectangles – Drawing arcs and circles – Shadows

UNIT III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9

Types of CSS – Conflicting style sheets – Positioning Elements – Element Dimension – Box model and Text Flow

– Media types – Media Queries – Drop-Down Menus – Text shadows – Rounded corners – Color – Box

Shadows. Introduction to JavaScript – Syntax - Variables and Data types – JavaScript Control Statements –

Operators – Literals - Functions – Objects – Arrays – Built-in objects

UNIT IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9

Introduction to the Document Object Model – Intrinsic Event Handling – Modifying Element Style – The Document

Tree – Properties of window – DOM Collections – Using Timer and Dynamic Styles to create animated effects –

JavaScript Event Handling – Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events – Form processing

with focus, blur, submit, reset – Event Bubbling – More Events

UNIT V PHP 9

Introduction – Converting Between Data Types – Arithmetic Operators – Initializing and Manipulating Arrays –

String Comparisons – String processing with regular expressions – Form Processing and Business Logic –

Reading from a database – Using Cookie – Dynamic Content

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson Education

Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.

2. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Springer, Second Edition, 2013

2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.

3. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., “Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,

PHP and jQuery”, Dreamtech Press, 2011.

4. Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.

174

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in

2. http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm

3. http://www.w3schools.com/php/

4. http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html

5. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP

15CSA02

FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering

To learn the requirements engineering process and planning for software development

To understand the software design principles

To know coding standards and different testing strategies

To learn the project management principles and quality assurance standards

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply software engineering principles for software development.

Formulate software requirement specification and plan for software development

Design software according to the specification

Code the software using guidelines / standards and conduct testing

Manage and maintain the software process by assuring the quality


Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques is preferred

UNIT I SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 8

The Nature of Software - Software Engineering - Software Myths – Process Models: Prescriptive Process

Models, Specialized Process Models, Personal and Team Process Models – Overview of Agile Process -

Overview of CMMi

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING AND PLANNING 10

Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements - Negotiating Requirements -

Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling. Process and Project Metrics:

Software Measurement - Metrics for Software Quality. Estimation: The Project Planning Process – Resources -

Software Project Estimation - Decomposition Techniques - Empirical Estimation Models - Project Scheduling

UNIT III MODELLING AND DESIGN 9

Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a Behavioral

Model Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,

Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and

Design, Interface Analysis

UNIT IV CODING AND SOFTWARE TESTING 9

Coding standards and guidelines - Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for

Conventional Software - Validation Testing - System Testing – Debugging – White-box Testing - Basis Path

Testing - Control Structure Testing - Black-box Testing

UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SOFTWARE QUALITY 9

Project Management Concepts: The Management Spectrum, People, Product and Process – Software

Configuration Management – Risk Management - Quality Management: Software Quality, Achieving Software

Quality - Elements of Software Quality Assurance - The ISO 9000 Quality Standard

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

175

TEXTBOOK:

1. Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R. Maxim, “Software Engineering – A practitioner’s approach”, McGraw

Hill Publications, Eighth Edition, 2014

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Pankaj Jalote, ”An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Springer, Third Edition, 2005

2. Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Seventh Edition, 2007.

3. Watts S.Humphrey, ”A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2007.

4. James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, ”Software Engineering, Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India, 2007.

5. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

6. S.A.Kelkar, ”Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.mhhe.com/pressman

2. www.rspa.com/spi/

3. http://www.comp.lancs.ac.uk/computing/resources/IanS/

4. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~cilab/main.html

5. http://www.wiley.com/college/comp/peters189642

15CSA03

INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications

To structure data using relational model

To explore the features of structured query language

To reduce the anomalies using Normalization

To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Draw the ER Diagram for enterprise applications

Design databases using relational model

Query the database using SQL

Apply normalization techniques on the databases

Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques.


Knowledge of Data Files is preferred

UNIT I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and

Administrators – Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity

Relationship Model – Constraints – Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets – E-R Diagrams - Design

Issues – Extended E-R Features – Introduction of Relational Model – E-R Reduction to Relational Schemas

UNIT II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9

Structure of Relational Databases – Database Schema – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query Languages -

Relational Algebra – Tuple Relational Calculus -– Domain Relational Calculus

UNIT III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9

Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Additional Basic

Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations – Nested Subqueries – Joins – Views –

Integrity Constraints – Authorization. Introduction to Advanced SQL: Functions and Procedures – Triggers

176

UNIT IV NORMALIZATION 9

Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal

Forms – Boyce Codd Normal Form

UNIT V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9

Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict serializability – View

Serializability – Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple

Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth

Edition, 2011.

2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson

Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley,

Sixth Edition, 2010.

2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,

Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.

3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition

2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in

2. http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html

3. http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf

4. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp

5. http://sqlzoo.net/

6. http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html

15CSA04

INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms

To learn the various searching and sorting techniques

To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue

To explore the binary trees and priority queues

To get exposure on hashing techniques and graphs

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity

Apply various searching / sorting algorithms for solving real-world problems

Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures

Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue

Exploit the hashing technique and graph algorithms


Knowledge of Memory Organization, Fundamentals of C Programming

177

UNIT I ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 9

Introduction to Algorithms and algorithmic problem solving – Problem types. Analysis of Algorithms: Analysis

Framework - Asymptotic Notations – Best case, worst case and average cases - Mathematical analysis of

non-recursive algorithms - Recurrence equations – Solving recurrence equations - Mathematical analysis of

recursive algorithms.

UNIT II SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9

Search Algorithms: Linear search - binary search - Analysis of Search algorithms. Sorting Algorithms: Bubble

sort - Exchange sort - Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort - Analysis of Sorting Algorithms.

UNIT III LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES 9

Abstract Data Types – The List ADT – Singly Linked List – Doubly Linked List – Circular Linked List –

Applications and analysis of List. The Stack ADT – Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT –

Applications and Analysis of Queues.

UNIT IV TREES AND HEAPS 9

Preliminaries – Binary Trees – Expression Trees- Traversals. The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees –

Applications of BST. Priority Queues – Binary heap – Heap operations - Applications of heaps.

UNIT V HASHING AND GRAPHS 9

Hashing – Closed hashing: Separate Chaining – Open Addressing - Linear probing. Graph ADT – Representation

of graph – Graph Traversals: DFS and BFS. Applications of Graph - Finding Shortest Path - Connected

components.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.

2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia, Second

Edition, 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson

Education, New Delhi, 2006

2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Orient

Longman, Second Edition, 2008.

3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101059/

2. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html

3. http://www.mif.vu.lt/~algis/dsax/DsSort.pdf

4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf

5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html

15CSA05

FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning

To study the concept of process management

To learn the basics of memory management

To understand the structure of file systems

To familiarize with different operating systems

178

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities

Analyze the various process management algorithms

Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques

Design a simple file system and analyze the performance

Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows


Working Principles of Computers

UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9

Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization - architecture – Operating system structure -

operations – Process, memory, storage management – Open source operating systems – OS services – User

interface – System calls – System programs – Process concept - scheduling – Operations on processes –

Cooperating processes – Inter-process communication – Threads

UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9

Basic concepts – Scheduling algorithms – Algorithm evaluation – The critical section problem – Synchronization

hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization – Deadlocks – Deadlock characterization –

Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery

from deadlock.

UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9

Memory management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging – Segmentation - Virtual memory:

Background – Demand paging – Copy on write – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing

UNIT IV FILE MANAGEMENT 9

File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File-system mounting – Protection – Directory

implementation – Allocation methods – Free space management – Disk scheduling – Disk management

UNIT V CASE STUDY 9

The Linux system – History – Process management – Scheduling – Memory management – File systems – Inter

Process Communication

Windows OS - History – Design principles

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John

Wiley & Sons Inc., 8th Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.

2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,

1996.

3. D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,

Second Edition, 2007.

4. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition,

2011.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in

2. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf

3. http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/

179

15CSA06

FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing

To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system

To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions

To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues

To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption

Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system

Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers

Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance

Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration


Knowledge of Computers, Networking is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9

Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and

Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -

Vocabulary - Challenges - Supporting services - Management and administration of Cloud services

UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9

Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -

Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability

standards

Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS

UNIT III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9

Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Comparison between

infrastructure service providers - Identification of business requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure -

Platform service providers - Comparison between platform service providers - Identification of business

requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -

Comparison between software service providers

Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms

UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9

Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges -

Vulnerability assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products

Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming -

Performance monitoring tools in cloud - Best practices

Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy

UNIT V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud

Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing -

Sky computing - Cloud governance

Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Cloud software

services adoption case study - Cloud simulation tools - Future of cloud computing

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

180

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rishabh Sharma, ”Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends”, Wiley India, 2015.

2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel

Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud

Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010.

2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and

Security”, CRC Press, 2010.

3. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud”

O'Reilly

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud

2. http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview

3. http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html

4. http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html

5. http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html

15CSA07

PRINCIPLES OF MULTIMEDIA

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the basic concepts related to Multimedia

To explain the basic multimedia building blocks and application development tools.

To demonstrate online multimedia application creation tools

To understand computer animation basics and needs

To demonstrate various computer animation techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the architectural components for multimedia applications.

Work with various elements of multimedia.

Develop audio, video, and images using multimedia tools.

Identify issues and solutions in implementing security for multimedia applications.

Model and render the 3D objects using animation tools.

Develop interactive animations using multimedia tools


Fundamental Knowledge of Graphics, Data is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 9

Multimedia overview: Components , Hypermedia ,File formats – Color models – Digital Audio representation –

Digital music making – MIDI - Digital Video: Video compression techniques – Multimedia for portable devices

UNIT II MULTIMEDIA BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Multimedia building blocks: Text, Graphics, Video Capturing, Sound capturing and editing - Introduction to 2D &

3D graphics – Surface characteristics and texture – Lights – Animation: key frames & tweening – Techniques –

Principles of animation – 3D animation – File formats

181

UNIT III MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 9

Databases: Properties of MMDBMS, Multimedia queries, Management of continuous data, document modeling,

Media Servers- Security: Digital Signatures, steganographic methods: single images, motion pictures, audio data,

3D scenes, copyright protection.

UNIT IV COMPUTER ANIMATION BASICS 9

History of Computer Animation - Modeling digital objects : Modeling Concepts - Modeling Techniques –

Rendering Concepts : Lights, Camera and Materials - color- Rendering Process - Hidden surface removal - Z-

Buffer - Ray tracing

UNIT V COMPUTER ANIMATION TECHNIQUES 9

Principles of animation - Computer Animation techniques: keyframe Techniques, camera animation, light

animation, animation file formats - Advanced Computer Animation techniques: Motion Capture, Facial animation,

crowd animation - Visual effects techniques: Crowd replications, 3-d morphing, motion control.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. John F. Koegel Bufend, “Multimedia systems”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002

2. Parekh R, “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.

3. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, Wiley Publications, 4th Edition,2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mohammed Dastbaz, “Designing Interactive Multimedia”, McGraw Hill Publication, 2002.

2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Applications”, Springer, 2007

15CSA08

INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms

To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators

To understand the multi objective optimization concepts

To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms

To study the applications of genetic algorithms

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore the basics of genetic algorithms

Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA

Work with multi objective optimization problems

Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems

Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems


Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques towards Optimization is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology – Mutation – Selection – Elitism – Crossover -

Initialization

UNIT II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9

Combinatorial optimization – Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and

crossover methods - Meta Gas – Mutation - Parallel GA

182

UNIT III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9

Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single

objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions

UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9

Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution

programming - Genetic programming – Multi-model function optimization

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid

crystals - Design of energy - efficient buildings - Multi objective network rehabilitation of Messy GA

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. David A Coley, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers”, World Scientific

Publishing Company,1997.

2. Kalyamoy Deb,” Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley & Sons, First

Edition, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Melaine Mitchell “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.

2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2008.

3. David E. Goldberg “Genetic Algorithms”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.

4. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max

Garzon, David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press.

Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1998.

5. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III , David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian

Invention and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html

2. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/

3. http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html#.VtVvblLlwgQ

4. http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009

5. http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html

6. http:// www.csbdu.in/pdf/Practical_Genetic_Algorithms.pdf

7. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/ga-basic-description.php

8. https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt

15CSA09

XML PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basics of markup languages and CSS

To acquire knowledge on XML and its DTD structure.

To understand XML schema creation.

To familiarize with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers.

To study XSLT documents and different custom markup languages.

https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt

183

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Construct / design web pages using HTML and CSS

Experiment XML document validation using DTD

Validate XML documents using schemas

Conduct experiments on XML documents using DOM / SAX parsers

Transform XML documents to HTML using XSLT and review other custom markup languages


Basic Principles of Programming is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKUPS AND CSS 9

History of WWW – History of SGML – History of XML – Review of HTML tags: Lists – tables – links – images -

frames. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS): Inline styles – creating CSS with style, element – external CSS.

UNIT II XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9

XML Markup introduction – Parsers, well-formed and valid XML documents – Parsing XML document with msxml

– characters – markup – XML namespaces - Document Type Declaration - Element Type Declarations - Attribute

Declarations – Simple DTD creation.

UNIT III XML SCHEMAS 9

Schema versus DTDs - Microsoft XML Schema: Describing elements - Describing attributes – Data types –

Simple XML schema creation.

UNIT IV DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9

DOM with JavaScript – DOM components – Traversing the DOM – SAX-based parsers – Events – Simple SAX

program – DOM versus SAX

UNIT V EXTENSIBLE STYLESHEET LANGUAGE TRANSFORMATION (XSLT) 9

Templates – Creating elements and attributes – Iteration and sorting – Conditional processing – Combining

stylesheets – Variables.

Introduction to Custom Markup Languages: Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) - Chemical Markup

Language (CML) - Wireless Markup Language (WML) - NewsML.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

2. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, “XML How to program”, Pearson Education

India, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Heather Williamson, “XML: The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.

2. Cliff Binstock, “The XML Schema Complete Reference”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.

3. Steven Holzner, “Inside XML”, New Riders, 2001.

4. Erik T. Ray, “Learning XML”, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.

5. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, “XML in a Nutshell”, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp

2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/xml/

3. http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/

4. http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial

http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial

184

15CSA10

INTRODUCTION TO UML

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce object oriented modelling concepts and the role of UML

To learn to model the requirements and work flows

To explore the ways to model logical structure

To know how to how to represent dynamic behavior in UML

To understand the representation of behavior modelling in UML

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Model a scenario using Object Oriented Modelling

Identify use cases and draw Use case and activity diagrams

Represent logical design using class and object diagrams

Represent dynamic behavior using sequence and collaboration diagrams

Model the behaviors using state transition diagram


Knowledge of Modelling, Object Oriented Principles is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OBJECT ORIENTED MODELLING 9

Introduction to UML - UML and Process - Perspectives of UML - Object Oriented Paradigm-Models - Object

Modelling - Models and Diagrams - Views of a Model

UNIT II MODELLING REQUIREMENT AND WORKFLOW 9

Modelling Requirements as Use cases - Use Case Diagrams – Relationships - Levels of Use Cases - Use cases

and features. Activity Diagrams: Basics – Activities and Action - Decisions and merges - Swim lanes -

Concurrency

UNIT III MODELLING LOGICAL STRUCTURE 9

Classes – Objects – Class relationship - Class Diagram – Multiplicity - Types – Implementation classes –

Interfaces – packages and subsystems – Object diagrams.

UNIT IV MODELLING ORDERED INTERACTION 9

Sequence Diagrams – Participants - Time-event, signals and messages - Use case and sequence diagram -

Collaboration Diagram

UNIT V BEHAVIOUR MODELLING 9

State Diagrams: States, Transitions, Advanced state diagrams. Component and Deployment Diagrams -

Extension using stereo types and properties

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

Kim Hamilton and Russell Miles, “Learning UML 2.0”, O'Reilly, 2006

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sinan Si Alhir, “Learning UML”, O'Reilly, 2003.

2. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled”, Addison Wesley, Third Edition, 2004.

3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”,

Addison-Wesley, 2005.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.uml.org/

2. http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs

http://www.uml.org/

http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs

185

3. https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/

4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/

15CSA11

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To have a knowledge on basic digital principles.

To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.

To explore the basic processing unit

To study the hierarchical memory system.

To learn the pipelining architecture concepts.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply digital principle concepts to design logical circuits

Design the arithmetic circuits for faster operations

Analyze the main processing units of a computer.

Analyze memory hierarchy and its impact on computer cost/performance.

Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum hazards


Knowledge in Working Principles of Computers is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PRINCIPLES 9

Boolean functions – Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map- Implementation of Boolean

functions using logic gates - Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers

UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9

Functional units – Basic operational concepts – Performance – Instructions and instruction sequencing –

Addressing modes – RISC and CISC Styles – Arithmetic: Design of fast adders – Multiplication of unsigned and

signed numbers – Fast Multiplication – Floating point numbers and operations.

UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9

Fundamental concepts – Instruction Execution – Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps

– Control Signals – Hardwired control

UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9

Basic concepts – Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM – Read-only Memories – Direct Memory Access –

Cache memories – Performance considerations – Virtual memory

UNIT V PIPELINING 9

Basic concepts – Pipeline organization and issues – Data dependencies – Memory and branch delays –

Performance evaluation

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and

Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.

2. M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The

Hardware/Software interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.

https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/

http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/

186

2. “Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson

Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.

4. Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th

Edition, 2005.

5. Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf

2. http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/

3. www.nptel.ac.in

4. http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html

Offered by Mechanical Department

SEMESTER V

15MEA01 AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The concepts of automobile maintenance

The methods of pollution control in automobiles

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basic concept of engine maintenance

Acquire knowledge about the Chassis Drive-line Maintenance

Understand the Maintenance and servicing of auxiliaries

Understand concept of Air Pollution due to Automobile Exhaust and its control methods

Understand about Exhaust Emission Control


Thermal Engineering and Automobile Engineering

UNIT I ENGINE MAINTENANCE 9

Engine troubles, effects & remedies, different major & minor services for engine, inspection and checking of

components visually and dimensionally, reconditioning methods of engine components, engine tune-up, special

tools & advanced equipment.

UNIT II CHASSIS DRIVE-LINE MAINTENANCE 9

Maintenance, repair and servicing of clutches, Fluid flywheel, gear boxes, Automatic transmission, Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT) unit, propeller shaft, differential unit, front axle and rear axle, suspension systems,

servicing of brake systems- hydraulic, air systems, brake bleeding and brakes adjustments, maintenance and

servicing of steering system-Manual & Power Steering system, wheel balancing, wheel alignment, maintenance

of tyres, tyre rotation, frame defects, chassis frame alignment.

187

UNIT III MAINTENANCE, SERVICING OF AUXILIARIES 9

Cooling system service, anti-corrosion additives, anti-freezing solutions, dry & wet liners, petrol fuel and diesel

fuel system maintenance, Multi-Point Fuel Injection (MPFI) maintenance, lubrication system services, chassis

lubrication, lubrication chart, maintenance and care of storage batteries, battery testing methods, maintenance of

ignition systems, tyre service & reconditioning.

UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION DUE TO AUTOMOBILE EXHAUST 9

Sources of Emission, Exhaust gas constituents & analysis, Ingredients responsible for air pollution, Smoke,

odour, Smog formation, Sources of pollution, effects, Analysis of air pollutants, Air pollution control models and

equipment.

UNIT V EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL 9

Basic methods of emission control, catalytic converter, After burners, reactor manifold, air injection, crank case

emission control, evaporative loss control, Exhaust gas recirculation, Fuel additives. Pollution Norms: European

pollution norms, Indian pollution norms as per Central Motor Vehicle Rules (C.M.V.R.), Measurement Devices for

HC, CO,NOX,Smoke.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. John B. Heyhood, “Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. Stone.R, “Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2002.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Society of Automotive Engineers, U.S., 13th revised

Edition, 2002.

2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.

3. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” Goodheart-Willcox Co;

Instructor's Manual Edition 2005.

4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications USA, 2003.

15MEA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVE:

To enable the students to understand the interaction between different parts of the energy system.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basics of energy systems.

Apply the fundamentals of energy conversion for practical applications.

Realize the importance of non-conventional energy systems.

Understand the concepts of Biomass energy.

Know about energy conservation techniques.


188

Power plant Technology.

Heat Transfer.

UNIT I ENERGY 9

Introduction to energy – Global energy scene – Indian energy scene - Units of energy conversion factors, general

classification of energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.

UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, Thermal, hydel and nuclear power plants,

Efficiency, merits and de-merits of the above power plants, combustion processes, fluidized bed combustion.

UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating, solar cooling,

solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power generation, solar energy

application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean

thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.

UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9

Biomass origin - Resources – Biomass estimation. Thermochemical conversion – Biological conversion,

Chemical conversion – Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, bio-crude, biodiesel power generation, gasifier, biogas,

integrated gasification.

UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy audit – Types

and methodology, reports, instruments. Material and energy balance, thermal energy management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., “Energy Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2005.

2. Rai, G.D., “Non-conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.

3. Nagpal, G.R., “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K., 3rd

Revised Edition 2012.

2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 1986.

3. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing

House, New Delhi, 2002.

4. Freris L.L., “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.

189

15MEA03 MANUFACTURING FOR INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Electronics manufacturing.

Surface Mount Technology and Packing Technology.

Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.

Repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basics of Electronics manufacturing and fabrication steps.

Know the types of Mounting and Packaging Technologies.

Know various Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.

Learn repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.


Crystal Structure, Semi-conducting materials.

Atomic Structure, Miller Indices, Periodic table, Crystal defects.

Various Joining processes, filing and assembly tools.

Silicon and its chemistry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTORS 9

Semiconductor materials, devices – Process technology – Basic fabrication steps – Oxidation,

Photolithography, Etching, Diffusion, Ion implantation, Metallization – Material characterization – Wafer

shaping – Crystal characterization.

UNIT II ETCHING AND DIFFUSION 9

Etching – Definition – Types - Wet chemical etching – Silicon, Silicon Dioxide, Silicon Nitride and Polysilicon,

Aluminum, Gallium Arsenide – Dry etching – Reactive plasma etching – Techniques and equipment –

Applications – Diffusion – Definition – Basic diffusion process – Extrinsic diffusion – Lateral diffusion.

UNIT III SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND PACKAGING 9

Introduction to packaging, types – Pin grid array package, Ball grid array package – Attachment

methodologies – Wire bonding, Tape automated bonding, Flip chip bonding – Surface mount technology –

Introduction – Through hole components.

UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING 9

Inspection techniques, equipment and principle - AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - Stencil printing

process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, under fill and encapsulation process -

Electrical testing of PCB assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing - Fixtures and jigs.

UNIT V REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS

ASSEMBLIES

9

Repair tools – Methods - Rework criteria and process - Thermo-mechanical effects and thermal management -

Reliability fundamentals - Reliability testing - Failure analysis - Design for manufacturability - Assembly –

Reworkability – Testing - Reliability and environment.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Gary S. May, Simon M. Sze, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Fabrication”, Wiley Student Edition,

2004.

2. Ray Prasad,” Surface Mount Technology – Principles and practice”, Second Edition, Chapman and

Hall, New York, 1997.

190

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Puligandla Viswanadham and Pratap Singh, Chapman and Hall, “Failure Modes and Mechanisms in

Electronic Packages”, New York, N.Y, 1998.

2. Ning - Cheng Lee, “Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT, BGA, CSP and Flip Chip

Technologies”, Elsevier Science, 1995.

3. Zarrow, Phil, “Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts”, Elsevier Science and Technology,

1997.

4. C.A.Harper, “Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc.,New York,

N.Y.,2004.

15MEA04 HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To recognize the important issues concerned with the human factors aspects of tasks, products and

environments.

To study human behaviour during working.

To know the methods of quantifying and predicting human comfort, human performance and human health.

To recognize the role of standards, recommendations and regulations applicable to tasks, products and

environments.

To recognize limitations to predict human responses, including inter-subject variability and intra-subject

variability.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to explain the various aspects of human sensory and cognitive attributes that influence human performance.

Able to design the working space, work station ergonomically by considering human body dimensions.

Able to predict the human behaviour, human comfort and human performance during working.

Able to design man machine system effectively.

Able to assess human skill and capabilities.


Basics of ergonomics, various work postures and risk factors.

Interest to study the human behaviour such as motivation talk, personality and determination of attitudes.

Ability to understand the concept behind man-machine system, theory behind Ergonomics system and virtual

environments.

Design of systems, tools and equipment, Knowledge of Man-Machine systems.

Work study, Method study, Motion study.

UNIT I ERGONOMICS AND ANATOMY 9

Introduction to ergonomics: The focus of ergonomics, ergonomics and its areas of application in the work system, a brief

history of ergonomics, attempts to humanize work, modern ergonomics,

Posture stability and posture adaptation, low back pain, risk factors for musculoskeletal disorders in the workplace,

behavioral aspects of posture.

UNIT II HUMAN BEHAVIOR 9

Individual differences, Factors contributing to personality, fitting the man to the job, Influence of difference on safety,

Method of measuring characteristics, Accident Proneness.

Motivation, Complexity of Motivation, Job satisfaction. Management theories of motivation, Job enrichment theory.

Frustration and Conflicts, -Determination of attitudes, changing attitudes. Motivational requirements.

191

UNIT III ANTHROPOMETRY AND WORK DESIGN FOR STANDING AND SEATED

WORKS 9

Designing for a population of users, percentile, sources of human variability, anthropometry and its uses in ergonomics,

principles of applied anthropometry in ergonomics, application of anthropometry in design, design for everyone,

anthropometry and personal space, effectiveness and cost effectiveness

Fundamental aspects of standing and sitting, an ergonomics approach to work station design, design for standing

workers, design for seated workers, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of static work,

effectiveness and cost effectiveness, research directions

UNIT IV MAN- MACHINE SYSTEM AND REPETITIVE WORKS AND MANUAL

HANDLING TASK

9

Applications of human factors engineering, man as a sensor, man as information processor, man as controller – Man Vs

Machine.

Ergonomics interventions in Repetitive works, handle design, key board design- measures for preventing in work related

musculoskeletal disorders (WMSDs), reduction and controlling, training.

Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling, prevention of manual handling injuries in the work place, design of

manual handling tasks, carrying, and postural stability.

UNIT V HUMAN SKILL & PERFORMANCE AND DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND

VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS

9

Human strength capabilities - Features of the human body- measures of the physiological functions-strength and

endurance- speed of movements.

Principles for the design of visual displays- auditory displays- design of controls- combining displays and controls- virtual

(synthetic) environments, research issues.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. Bridger R.S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, CRC Press; 3rd Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Michael O’Neill, “Ergonomic Design for Organizational Effectiveness”, CRC Press; 2ndEdition 1998.

2. Mark S. Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 7th Edition, 1992.

3. Philip Jacobs, Dan McLeod & Nancy Larson, “The Ergonomics Manual”, Saunders group, UK, 1990.

4. Thomas A. Hunter, “Engineering Design for Safety”, McGraw-Hill, 1992.

15MEA05 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


To review and clarify the fundamental terms, concepts associated with Decision Support Systems,

computerized decision aids, expert systems, group support systems and executive support systems.

To discuss the modelling and analysis of the Decision Support Systems.

To understand the enterprise DSS and knowledge management.

To understand the intelligent systems used in DSS.

To discuss organizational and social implications of Decision Support Systems.

http://www.amazon.com/Thomas-A.-Hunter/e/B001KCW654/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

192

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of decisions and decision analysis including probability,

decisions under uncertainty, risk taking, and real-world problems.

Demonstrate the different models used in the DSS.

Analyze, design and build an information system using emerging tools and technologies for a given

business problem.

Recognize the relationship between enterprise information needs and decision making.

Explain the components and concepts of DSS, their characteristics and capabilities.

Analyze typical decision situations to determine whether it is practical to support them with computer

technology and, if so, how.

Gain an appreciation of working on systems development projects in a team environment and obtain

experience with project management.

Describe and understand the concept of decision support systems including collection of data, database

management, modeling, group and organizational decision support systems, executive information

systems, and expert systems.


Operation analysis, Reasoning skills and critical thinking and Deductive problem solving techniques.

UNIT I DECISION MAKING AND COMPUTERIZED SUPPORT 9

Decision Making: Introduction and Definitions - Managers and Decision Making - Managerial decision making and

Information Systems - Managers and computerized support Need - framework for decision support – concept of

decision support systems (DSS) –executive support systems - preview of the modeling process-phases of decision

making process.

UNIT II MODELING AND ANALYSIS 9

DSS components- DSS classifications - Data warehousing, access, analysis, mining and visualization - modeling

and analysis- Static and dynamic models – influence diagrams – Optimization via mathematical programming –

Heuristic programming – simulation – multidimensional modeling – model base management.

UNIT III ENTERPRISE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND

KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT

9

Group decision making – Group support systems- Technologies – Creativity and Idea generation - enterprise

information systems (EIS) – Comparing and Integrating EIS and DSS - supply and value chain and DSS- supply

chain problems and solutions – Computerized systems - knowledge management methods, technologies and

tools.

UNIT IV INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 9

Artificial intelligence (AI) – Concepts and Definitions – AI versus natural intelligence - expert systems-concepts,

structure, types and benefits and problems – knowledge Engineering - knowledge acquisition and validation -

knowledge representation – Techniques – Inference techniques

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION, INTEGRATION, AND IMPACTS 9

Implementation – Major issues of implementation – implementation strategies – Models of integration – Intelligent

DSS – Intelligent modelling and model management – problems and issues in integration - impact of management

support systems - overview – personnel management issues – impact of Individuals – Impacts on productivity,

quality and competitiveness – Issues of legality, privacy and ethics – Other societal impacts.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

193

TEXTBOOK:

1. Efraim Turban and Jay E Aronson, “Decision Support and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice Hall, 6thEdition,

2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. George M. Marakas, “Decision Support Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002.

2. Daniel J. Power, “Decision Support Systems: Concepts and Resources for Managers”, Greenwood

Publishing Group, 1st Edition, 2002.

3. Quazi Khabeer, “Business Process Management and Decision Support Systems”, Alpha Science

International Limited, 1stEdition, 2013.

4. Elain Rich, Kevin Knight and Shivashankar B. Nair , “Artificial intelligence”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Limited, 3rd Edition, 2009.

15MEA06 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn about the basics of economics.

To make cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions.

To learn about different types of maintenance analysis.

To learn about depreciation and inflation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the completion of the course the students will be able to

Understand the concept of Engineering Economics, types of costs and make economic analysis.

Remember, understand and apply various Interest formulae and their applications for different

investment situations.

Compare and analyze various investment alternatives and make appropriate decisions.

Make replacement and maintenance analysis to take optimal decisions.

Understand the concept of depreciation, and inflation.


Economics basics.

Profit and Loss.

Concept of money, loans.

Interest rate, maintenance

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9

Introduction to economics-Flow in an economy-Law of supply and demand, Concept of engineering

economics-Engineering efficiency, economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics – Elements of costs,

marginal cost, marginal revenue, sunk cost, opportunity cost, break-even analysis- V ratio, Elementary

economic analysis – Material selection for product design selection for a product, process planning.

UNIT II VALUE ENGINEERING 9

Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest formulae

and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single payment

194

present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth

factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective

interest rate, Examples in all the methods.

UNIT III CASH FLOW 9

Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram),

Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), Annual

equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), rate of return

method, Examples in all the methods.

UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9

Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,

determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with

return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail completely.

UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9

Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of depreciation-Sum

of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity method of

depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Examples,

Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and

determination of economic life of asset.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition2015.

2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis”, Oxford University

Press, 12th Edition, 2013.

3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson, 6th Edition2014.

4. Grant.E.L, Ireson.W.G, and Leavenworth, R.S, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, Wiley, 8th

Edition1990.

5. Smith, G.W., “Engineering Economy”, Iowa State Press, 4th Edition1987.

15MEA07 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics behind the nanotechnology.

To impart knowledge on the synthesis of various nanomaterials.

To acquire knowledge on the characterization tools used in nanotechnology.

To have exposure on nanomaterials patterning technologies.

To gain knowledge on nanodevices and their purpose in the engineering applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate the classification and properties of nanomaterials.

Able to synthesis various nanomaterials.

Identify the various characterization techniques using sophisticated techniques.

195

Understand the patterning and lithographic techniques.

Apply the perceptions of the nanotechnology for various technical applications.


Material Science.

Basic knowledge in Physics and Chemistry.

Fundamentals and technological importance of new materials.


Nanoscale architecture -Classification of nanostructures - Surface to volume ratio -Fraction of surface atoms –

Surface energy- changes to the system total energy - effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties –

thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.

UNIT II PREPARATION METHODOLOGIES 9

Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, ECAP process – bottomup process – vapour phase

deposition methods – plasmaassisted deposition process - MBE and MOMBE - liquid phase methods -

colloidal and solgel methods – methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems

- self-assembly.

UNIT III CHARACTERISATION 9

Analytical and imaging techniques - Electron Microscopy: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission

Electron Microscopy - Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy - Atomic Force Microscopy – X-Ray diffraction

techniques – Spectroscopy techniques – Raman spectroscopy – surface analysis and depth profiling.

UNIT IV PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES 9

Optical lithography – Electron lithography - X-ray Lithography - Ion lithography. Plasma properties – Feature

size control and anisotropy etch mechanism – Lift off techniques – Plasma reactor – Fl2 & Cl2 based etching –

Relative plasma etching techniques and equipments.

UNIT V NANODEVICES 9

Single Electron devices: Nano scale MOSFET – Resonant tunnelling transistor – Single electron transistors -

Single electron dynamics - Nano robotics and Nano manipulation DNA based nano devices – Gas based nano

devices - Quantum structures and devices - Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires - Carbon nanotube based

logic gates, optical devices - Connection with quantum devices- Single molecule electronic devices – photonic

band gap systems - applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Timp Gregory, “Nanotechnology”, Springer, 2012.

2. Guozhong Cao, “Nanosrtuctures and nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial

College Press, 2004.

3. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, “Nanoscale Science and Technology”, John Wiley &

sons, Inc., 2005.

4. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, “Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nano structuring

Techniques”, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH, 2009.

5. Charles. P. Poole, Frank. J. Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley, 2010.

6. Stefan Landis, “Nano Lithography”, Wiley, 2011.

7. Pradeep T., “A Text book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

196

15MEA08 FUEL CELL & HYDROGEN ENERGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

• To familiarize the need and production of Hydrogen.

• To impart basic knowledge about Fuel cell.

• To analyze the fuel cell from the thermodynamics perspective.

• To understand the different components and types of fuel cell.

• To know the heat and mass transfer analysis and current issues of fuel cell.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


• To acquire the basics involved in the production of Hydrogen and its storage.

• To understand the working principle of fuel cell.

• To gather knowledge about the thermodynamics, and electrochemical engineering perspectives of

fuel cell technology.

• To acquire fundamental knowledge in the development of fuel cell technology.

• Gathered the fundamental knowledge about the heat and mass transfer in fuel cell.


• Basic chemistry.

• Thermodynamics

UNIT I HYDROGEN ENERGY 9

Hydrogen: Its merit as a fuel; Applications, Hydrogen production methods - Production of hydrogen from fossil

fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and photo-catalytic methods. Hydrogen storage

methods - Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes, sea as source of deuterium.

UNIT II FUEL CELL BASICS 7

Fuel cell definition, Difference between batteries and fuel cells, fuel cell history, components of fuel cells,

principle of working of fuel cells

UNIT III FUEL CELL THERMODYNAMICS 10

Second law analysis of fuel cells, efficiency of fuel cells, fuel cell electrochemistry - Nernst equation,

Electrochemical kinetics, Butler-Volmer equation, Fuel cell types - Classification by operating

temperature/electrolyte type, Fuel Cell Performance, Activation, Ohmic and Concentration over potential

UNIT IV FUEL CELL DESIGN AND COMPONENTS 9

Cell components, stack components, system components, Overview of intermediate/high temperature fuel

cells - Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC), Molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC), Phosphoric acid fuel cells (PAFC),

Polymer Electrolyte fuel cells (PEFC)

UNIT V HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN FUEL CELLS 10

Heat and mass transfer in polymer electrolyte fuel cells, water management in PEFCs, Current issues in

PEFCs Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC) - Electrochemical kinetics methanol oxidation, Current issues in

DMFCs, Fuel crossover in DMFCs, Water management in DMFCs, high methanol concentration operation,

limiting current density

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

197

TEXTBOOKS:

1. J. Larminie and A. Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, SAE International and John Wiley &

Sons,2nd Edition, 2003.

2. Xianguo Li, “Principles of Fuel Cells”, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005.

3. S. Srinivasan, “Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals to Applications”, Springer US, CBS Publishers: New Delhi, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ryan O'Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella and Fritz B. Prinz, “Fuel Cell Fundamentals”, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2008.

2. Allen J. Bard and Larry R. Faulkner, “Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.

3. Amir Faghriand Yuwen Zhang, “Transport Phenomena in Multiphase Systems”, Academic Press; 1st Edition, 2006.

15MEA09

BIO-MECHANICS AND HUMAN BODY VIBRATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the functions of various muscular skeletal system and anthrometry.

To correlate the human body vibration and muscular skeletal system.

To know about various bio mechanical models and acquire knowledge on work capacity.

To know about the various types of vibration and its relevant criteria.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course, the students would

Analyse the various types of vibration and its relation to the bio mechanical models.

Acquire knowledge on Anthrometric data and Bio mechanical studies in the industries.

Acquire the knowledge on evaluation of work capacity vibration measurement.


Basic knowledge on biology.

Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics.

UNIT I VIBRATION 9

Introduction, vibration exciters, control systems, Performance specification, motion sensors and transducers

UNIT II MUSCULARSKELETAL SYSTEM AND ANTHROPOMETRY IN

BIOMECHANICS

9

Introduction, structure and function of musculoskeletal system - Connective Tissue, Skeletal Muscle, Joints

Measurement of body segment, physical properties, Anthropometric data for biomechanical studies in

industry

UNIT III MECHANICAL WORK CAPACITY EVALUATION AND

BIOINSTRUMENTATION

9

Joint motion, human motion analysis system, applied electromyography, intradiscal pressure measurement,

intrabdominal measurement, force platform system, whole body vibration measurement.

UNIT IV BIOMECHANICAL MODELS 9

Planar static biomechanical models, static 3D modelling, dynamic biomechanical models, special purpose

biomechanical models.

198

UNIT V WHOLE BODY AND SEGMENTAL VIBRATION 9

Vibration on human body, whole body vibration, Hand-Transmitted Vibration, segmental vibration, vibration

exposure criteria.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Vibration and Shock Handbook, Clarence W. De Silva, Taylor and Francis Group, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOK:

1.Occupational Biomechanics, Don B. Chaffin and Gunnar B.J.Andersson, John Wiley and sons, Inc.

15MEA10 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The interaction between different concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer.

The application of thermodynamics and heat transfer to various industries.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics.

Acquire knowledge about the power plants.

Know the applications of psychrometry.

Understand the basic concepts of Refrigeration.

Understand the basic concepts of Air conditioning.


Engineering Thermodynamics

Power plant technology

Thermal Engineering

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS 12

Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems,

Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Property, Process, Cycle – Reversibility – Quasi-static Process, Irreversible

Process, Types, Work and Heat, Point and Path function, Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of

Thermometry, Steady Flow Energy Equation, Limitations of First Law of Thermodynamics, Second law of

Thermodynamics, entropy (Elementary treatment only).

UNIT II POWER PLANTS 7

Introduction to thermodynamic cycles, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, Tidal, Geothermal, Wind, Solar power plants-

schematic and working.

UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY 7

Properties of air-water vapour mixtures: Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Relative Humidity, dew

point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, enthalpy of moist air, sensible

heating and cooling, Adiabatic humidification and dehumidification, By-pass factor, Cooling load calculations

using psychrometric table and chart.

199

UNIT IV REFRIGERATION 12

Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – Performance calculations - working principle

of vapour absorption system, Ammonia –Water, Lithium bromide –water systems (Description only) - Alternate

refrigerants – Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems

UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING 7

Air conditioning system: Types, Working Principles – Cooling Load calculations – Concept of Room Sensible

Heat Factor, Grand Sensible Heat Factor, Effective Sensible Heat Factor.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Note: Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and refrigerant property

tables are permitted in the examination

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Sarkar, B.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.

2. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal engineering“, Dhanpat

Rai & sons, 5th Edition, 2012.

3. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Nag P. K, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 3rdEdition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Engineering” S.Chand Publishers , 2010

2. Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach” TataMcGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition,

2006.

3. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill 2001.

15MEA11 FUNDAMENTALS OF LITHOGRAPHY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Lithography is a study of printing micron to nano scale features on silicon wafer. Complete understanding of

the course makes the student technically strong in nano fabrication.

To impart sound knowledge about the fundamentals of clean room and nano fabrication by optical

projection lithography.

To emphasize about the importance of mask and maskless lithography.

To motivate the pattern transfer technique with high energetic electron beam concepts.

This course provides information about printing the pattern with ion beam sources.

To enable the knowledge about printing with soft lithographic concepts and etching the

unwantedportions.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After studying this course students will be able to:

It emphasize about the fabrication of integrated circuits on microchip using optical principles.

Understand about the extreme UV light and zone plates as maskless techniques.

Applying scanning electron beam techniques in nano fabrication.

Imparts knowledge about the use of Ion beam/focused ion beam as tools for developing nano objects.

Provides impression about soft lithography techniques and various modes of etching.

200


Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology.

Microelectro mechanical systems and Nano electro mechanical systems.

Fundamentals of Micro fabrication.

Fundamental principles of optical lithography.

UNIT I PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 10

Introduction to lithography – lithography processes; mask making, wafer pre-treatment, resist spinning – pre-

bake, exposure, development and rinsing, post-bake, resist stripping, positive and negative photoresists – lift

off profile - introduction to semiconductor processing - necessity for a clean room - different types of clean

rooms - maintenance of a clean room – micro fabrication process flow diagram – chip cleaning, coating of

photoresists, patterning, etching, inspection – process integration - etching techniques - reactive Ion etching -

magnetically enhanced RIE- Ion beam etching - other etching techniques.

UNIT II PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS 9

Lithography - optical lithography - different modes - optical projection lithography - multistage scanners –

resolution and limits of photolithography – resolution enhancement techniques - photo mask- binary mask -

phase shifting mask - attenuated phase shift masks - alternating phase shift masks - off axis illumination -

optical proximity correction - sub resolution assist feature enhancement - optical immersion lithography.

UNIT III DIRECT WRITING METHODS - MASKLESS OPTICAL LITHOGRAPHY 7

Maskless optical projection lithography – types, advantages and limitations – required components - zone

plate array lithography - extreme ultraviolet lithography – light sources - optics and materials issues.

UNIT IV ELECTRON BEAM LITHOGRAPHY, ION BEAM & X-RAY

LITHOGRAPHY

10

Scanning electron - beam lithography - electron sources and electron optics system – maskless EBL- electron

beam projection lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection e-beam lithography - projection

reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses - Ion beam lithography - focusing ion beam lithography

- ion projection lithography – X-ray lithography – X-ray masks, resists, merits and demerits - atom lithography.

UNIT V NANOIMPRINT LITHOGRAPHY AND SOFT LITHOGRAPHY 9

Nano imprint lithography - hot embossing - soft Lithography- moulding/replica moulding: PDMS stamps -

printing with soft stamps - edge lithography - dip-pen lithography - set up and working principle – self-

assembly – LB films.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Chris Mack, “Fundamental principles of optical lithography: The science of micro fabrication”, Wiley,

2008.

2. M. Madou, “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2002.

3. Stepanova, Maria, “Nano fabrication techniques and principles”, Dew, Steven (Eds.) Springer, 2012.

4. John A. Rogers & Hong H. Lee, “Unconventional nano patterning techniques and applications”, A

John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.

5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, devices and structures”, CRC Press LLC,

2002.

201

6. Zheng Cui, “Nano fabrication – Principles, capabilities and limits”, Springer Science, 2008.

7. Mark J. Jackson, “Micro fabrication and nano manufacturing”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,

2006.

15MEA12 FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an in depth knowledge about the fundamentals of fire and explosion.

To understand the causes and effects of fire and explosion.

To know the various fire and explosion prevention systems and protective equipment.

To understand the protection of building from fire.

To understand the various fire prevention techniques to be followed in a building.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


To make familiar about basic concepts of fire and explosion science.

To k n o w the d i f f e r e n t causes and effects of fire and explosion.

To understand the operation of various types of fire fighting equipment.

To understand the prevention of explosion.

To equip the students to effectively employ fire protection techniques in building.


Fundamentals of Thermodynamics.

Various modes of heat transfer.

Fluid mechanics, Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Physics.

Building materials used for construction.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE 9

Combustion process & concepts, combustion in solids, liquid, gases- smouldering fires- Spontaneous

combustion - rapid fire progress phenomena- Properties influencing fire hazard – properties of solid, liquid

and gaseous fuels - classification of fires.

UNIT II FIRE CONTROL 9

Fire extinguishers – Location and operation of extinguishers - Extinguishing methods- extinguishing agents:

water, foam, chemical powder, CO2, sand, steam, saw dust – Fire detectors – Fire tender - Automatic fire

extinguishing system - Fixed fire fighting installations - Risk analysis: risk assessment, consequence analysis,

risk reduction – Fire drill – Emergency procedures.

UNIT III PRODUCTS AND EFFECTS OF COMBUSTION 9

Heat: Conduction, convection, radiation- effects of heat- effects of flames – different fire gases and their

effects – effects of smoke on humans– Smoke movement control and venting - Effects of explosion – Negative

pressure wave – Fragmentation – case studies.

UNIT IV BUILDING FIRE SAFETY 9

Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing – concept of egress

design - exits – width calculations -– fire safety requirements for high rise buildings – Behavior of materials &

structures in fire – Concrete and steel. Flame spread in high rise building – Statutory requirements.

202

UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSION 9

Introduction – Explosion fundamentals – Types – Physical, BLEVE, Chemical explosion – Vapour cloud

explosion – Dust explosion – Explosion prevention – Explosion mitigation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Purandare D.D., Abhay D. Purandare, “Hand Book on Industrial Fire Safety”, 1st Edition, P & A

Publications.

2. Derek, James, “Fire Prevention Hand Book”, Butter Worths and Company, London, 1986.

3. Jain V.K., Fire Safety in Building, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gupta, R.S., “Hand Book of Fire Technology” Orient Longman, Bombay, 2010.

2. “Accident Prevention manual for industrial operations” N.S.C., Chicago, 1982.

3. Dinko Tuhtar, “Fire and explosion protection – A system approach”, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1989.

4. “Fire fighters hazardous materials Reference Book Fire Prevention in Factories”, Nostrand Rein

Hold, New York, 1991.

5. Lees F.P., “Fire Prevention and firefighting”, Loss prevention Association, India.

15MEA13 HIGH ENERGETIC MATERIAL - PROPELLANTS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study about the process of conversion of the high energy released by materials due to

decomposition into useful work.

This course deals with the study of the application of the released energy into different categories like

explosives, propellant and pyrotechnics.

To understand the background aspects of the different products of explosives, pyro techniques and

propellant by any engineering student.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the classification of high energy materials according to the process.

Apply the release of energy into useful work in different categories.

Understand the basic characteristics and ingredients of Propellant.

Know about the basic process of pyro techniques.

Understand the various processing techniques of explosives in an ethical manner.


Materials: Inorganic materials, Ferrous and Non-ferrous materials.

Organic materials, Polymers.

Fundamentals of Combustion.

Chemistry of burning.

Hazardous materials.

UNIT I EXPLOSIVE MATTER 9

High energetic material – Definition – Classifications – Explosives – Reactive explosive materials – Primary

explosives – Secondary explosives – Military explosives – Industrial explosives – Nitro explosives – Liquid

oxidizers and explosives.

203

UNIT II GUN PROPELLANT 9

Low explosives - Gun propellant – Features - Deflagration – Ballistic property – Homogeneous propellant -

Single base propellant – Nitrocellulose – Stabilizer – Characteristics - Double base propellant – Nitrocellulose

and nitroglycerin – Additives - Extruded Double-Base Propellants - Cast Double-Base Propellants – Liquid

propellant.

UNIT III ROCKET PROPELLANT 9

Rocket Propellant - Composite propellant – Features - Ingredients - Fuels, oxidizers, binders – Additives –

Cross linking agents – Plasticizers – Stabilizers – Burn rate modifier – Characteristics - Inhibition – Neutral and

Progressive burning– Inhibition techniques.

UNIT IV PYROTECHNICS 9

Pyrotechnics – General features - Ingredients of Pyrotechnic Formulations – Fuel, Oxidizers, Binders,

Coolants, Retardants, Dyes, Color Intensifiers, Moderators – Characteristics- Pyrotechnic formulations -

Illuminating formulations - Delay formulations - Smoke formulations - Incendiary formulations.

UNIT V PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR EXPLOSIVES 9

Extrusion - Casting types– Normal, Melt, Vibration, Squeeze casting, Pressing – Unidirectional, Double Action,

Incremental, Hydrostatic, Iso-static pressing – Stability of explosives – Vacuum stability test – Heat test –

Impact sensitivity test.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. “High Energy Materials – Propellants, Explosives and Pyrotechnics” Jai Prakash Agarwal, WILEY-

VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. "High Energy Oxidisers for Advanced Solid Propellants and Explosives - Advances in Solid Propellant

Technology”, First International HEMSI Workshop, Ranchi, India, 2002, 87-106.

2. “The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives”, Davis, Tenney L. – Open source downloadable.

15MEA14 DIRECT DIGITAL MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Direct Digital Manufacturing technology and the associated Aerospace, Architecture, Art, Medical and

industrial applications.

Different types of Image capturing and Image processing techniques and its applications in various

fields.

Study of production of x-rays and its application to different medical Imaging techniques and different

types of Radio diagnostic techniques.

Study of digitization and special imaging techniques used for visualizing the cross sections of the body.

Understanding of various geometric modeling and meshing techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Learn about the principle of Direct Digital Manufacturing (DDM) techniques, and along with their

potential applications to customized manufacturing.

Understand the basic concepts of reverse engineering and various image processing techniques.

Effectively employ the free form fabrication technique in launching a new product in market within a

short span of time.

204

Trained to find innovative solutions to fabricate highly intricate complex shapes by suitable digital

manufacturing technique.

Get exposure to various diagnostic applications of the medical imaging integrated with 3D Printing and

SDM technique.


Digitization Techniques.

Geometric modeling techniques.

Processing CAD Data (Selection of Orientation, Supports generation, Slicing, Toolpath generation).

Data Exchange Formats.

Reverse Engineering Techniques.

Medical Image sources, Medical Image Representation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CAD MODELING 11

Introduction of DDM - Need - Development of DDM systems – DDM process chain - Impact of DDM on Product

Development in various fields –Digital & Virtual prototyping -Benefits- Applications. Digitization techniques –

geometric modeling techniques: Wire frame, surface and solid modeling – Part orientation and support

generation, direct and adaptive slicing, Tool path generation.

UNIT II REVERSE ENGINEERING AND MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM 9

Basics of Medical Image Sources: Radiology - Computed Tomography- Magnetic Resonance Tomography –

Medical Image Representation: Pixels and voxels - Image file formats- DICOM- Other formats- Medical image

analysis: Image segmentation - Image representation and analysis - Feature extraction and representation.

UNIT III POWDER BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9

Selective Laser Sintering(SLS): Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- Powder structures, modeling of SLS,

materials, post processing, post curing, surface deviation and accuracy, Applications. Laser Engineered Net

Shaping (LENS): Processes, materials, products, advantages, limitations and applications– Case Studies.

UNIT IV LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED DDM SYSTEMS 9

Stereo Lithography (SLA): Apparatus: Principle, per-build process, part-building, post-build processes, photo

polymerization of SL resins, part quality and process planning, recoating issues, materials, advantages,

limitations and applications. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and

applications. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types,

products, materials and applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Working Principles, details of

processes, products, materials, advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies.

UNIT V 3D PRINTING AND SHAPE DEPOSITION MANUFACTURING

TECHNIQUES

7

Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic process, Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process

capabilities, material system. Solid based, Liquid based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and

weakness, Applications and case studies. Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM): Introduction, basic process,

shape decomposition, Mould SDM and applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, World Scientific

Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2010.

2. Andreas Gebhardt, “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 1st Edition, 2003.

3. Steve Webb, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Medical Science Series, Institute of Physics Publishing,

Bristol, 1992.

205

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. LiouW.Liou, Frank W.Liou,”Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype

development”, CRC Press, 2007.

2. Ali K. Kamrani, EmadAbouel Nasr, “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.

3. Peter D.Hilton Hilton/Jacobs, Paul F.Jacobs, “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”,

CRC press, 2000.

4. Wolfgang Birkfellner, “Applied Medical Image Processing – A Basic course‟, CRC Press, 2nd Edition,

2014.

5. R.C.Gonzalez and R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing‟, Pearson-Prentice-Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.

15MEA15 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS OF MATERIALS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know about the basic principles of spectroscopy.

To understand about the molecular spectroscopy.

To acquire knowledge about NMR and mass spectroscopy.

To inculcate about the separation techniques.

To measure and evaluate about the surface properties.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Obtaining fundamental knowledge about optical spectroscopy.

Gaining knowledge about molecular and atomic spectroscopy.

Gathering enough knowledge in the field of nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.

Studying about the separation of various constituents present in a mixture by chromatographic

techniques.

Acquiring knowledge about electrochemical analysis.


Material science, physics and chemistry.

Basic information on scattering processes involving X-rays,visible light, electrons.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF SPECTROMETRY 9

Properties of electromagnetic radiation- wave properties – components of optical instruments – Sources of

radiation – wavelength selectors – sample containers – radiation transducers – Signal process and read outs –

signal to noise ratio - sources of noise – Enhancement of signal to noise - types of optical instruments – Principle

of Fourier Transform optical Measurements.

UNIT II MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY 9

Molecular absorption spectrometry – Measurement of Transmittance and Absorbance – Beer’s law –

Instrumentation - Applications -Theory of fluorescence and Phosphorescence Instrumentation – Applications –

Theory of Infrared absorption spectrometry – IR instrumentation - Applications – Theory of Raman spectroscopy

– Instrumentation – applications.

206

UNIT III MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY AND

MASSSPECTROMETRY

9

Theory of NMR – environmental effects on NMR spectra –chemical shift-NMR spectrometers – applications of 1H

NMR- Molecular mass spectra – ion sources – Mass spectrometer. Applications of molecular mass – Electron

paramagnetic resonance- g values – instrumentation.

UNIT IV SEPARATION METHODS 9

General description of chromatography – Band broadening and optimization of column performance- Liquid

chromatography – Partition chromatography - Adsorption chromatography – Ion exchange chromatography -

principles of GC and applications – HPLC- Capillary electrophoresis – Applications.

UNIT V ELECTRO ANALYSIS AND SURFACE MICROSCOPY 9

Electrochemical cells- Electrode potential - EMF – potentiometry-reference electrode – ion selective and

molecular selective electrodes– Voltammetry – Cyclic and pulse voltammetry- Applications of voltammetry -

Study of surfaces – Scanning probe microscopes – AFM and STM.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. D.A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanky, R.Crouch, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, Cengage Learning,

2007.

2. G. Aruldhas, “Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy”. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2007.

3. Elsa Lundanes, Leon Reubsaet, TygeGreibrokk. “Chromatography: Basic Principles, Sample

Preparations and Related Methods”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.

4. Fritz Scholz, “Electroanalytical Methods: Guide to Experiments and Applications”, Springer Science &

Business Media, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. James Keeler, “Understanding NMR spectroscopy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

2. Jack Cazes, “Encyclopedia of Chromatography”, Volume 2, CRC Press, 2005.

3. Challa S.S.R. Kumar,“Surface Science Tools for Nanomaterials Characterization”, Springer, 2015.

15MEA16 BASICS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide in depth knowledge in the evolution of aircrafts.

To give understanding of concept of aerospace engineering.

To get exposed to the various aircraft materials and aircraft structures.

To develop knowledge in satellites and satellite launching vehicles.

To analyse the current trends in the field of Manned Mission.

207

COURSE OUTCOMES:

This course would make familiar of basic concepts of aviation.

Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the aircraft structures.

Students would be trained in the current engineering materials and structures of an aircraft.

One would be able to make use of knowledge for the design of rocket, satellites, and space shuttles in

the field of inter-discipline.

This Course would equip the students to effectively enhance the concepts of aircrafts and spacecrafts


Basics of Earth science, solar science.

Keen interest in Aerospace.

Basics of Material science.

Polymers, Ceramics.

Fuels-Liquids, solids and gases.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIATION 9

Astronomy: overview of astronomy – know the sky – coordinate system – telescopes – flux, magnitudes – stars,

formation – solar system.

Atmospheric Science: Earth’s atmosphere, structure, classification, constituents– standard atmosphere-

Introduction to space environment-Historical perspective of aviation.

UNIT II AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9

Aerodynamic forces – lift generation – aerofoils and wings – drag – anatomy of an aircraft – mechanism of thrust

production – propeller – jet engines and their operation – helicopters – aircraft performance – aircraft

instruments-fatigue failure in aircrafts – Airplane Disasters.

UNIT III AIRCRAFT MATERIALS & STRUCTURES 9

Light-weight materials- FRP: GFRP, CFRP- Applications of FRP in principal parts of aircrafts.

Radome-fuselage-wings-landing gears-black box-Research Issues: smart skins in aircraft-structural health

monitoring (SHM) of aircrafts.

UNIT IV ROCKETS & SATELLITES 9

Introduction to rockets – rocket propulsion engines – types of rockets- nozzles – propellants –rocket engines–

elements of liquid propulsion systems – solid rocket motors – rocket testing – launch preparation.

Types of satellites- present-day satellites- satellite structures- satellite operations-application of shape memory

alloy (SMA) in satellites.

UNIT V LAUNCH VEHICLES FOR MANNED MISSION 9

Overview of Re-entry vehicles and Manned missions-Shuttle components -Orbiter Vehicle (OV), a pair of

recoverable solid rocket boosters (SRBs)-expendable external tank (ET) –Space shuttle disasters: A case study.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

208

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Megson, T. H. G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Hein-emann,

2007.

2. Turner, M. J. L., “Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principles, Practice and New Developments”, 3rd

Edition, Springer, 2009.

3. Anderson, D. F. and Eberhardt, S., “Understanding Flight”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Wiesel, W. E., “Spaceflight Dynamics”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.

2. Kaplan, M. H., “Modern Spacecraft Dynamics and Control”, John Wiley and Sons, London, 1976.

3. Thompson, W. T., “Introduction to Space Dynamics”, Dover Publications, New York, 1986.

4. Cornelisse, J. W., “Rocket Propulsion and Spaceflight Dynamics”, Pitman, London, 1979.

5. Anderson, J. D., “Introduction to Flight”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.

Szebehely, V. G. and Mark, H., “Adventures in Celestial Mechanics”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 1998.

15MEA17 INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB WITH ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Basic concept of Matlab.

Matlab codes and programming.

Exploit of the plotting.

Writing program for solving linear system, curve fitting, numerical integration & one dimensional

equation, which are needed for engineering disciplines.

Concept of Simulink, for solving engineering problem.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Extrapolate the basic of Matlab commands.

Write codes for simple applications.

Programming for solving linear system, Gaussian elimination, finite difference method, finite element

method.

Plot the graphs using code.

Familiar with the concepts of Simulink for engineering applications.


Basic programming concepts.

Analytical skills.

Matrix manipulations.

Linear algebra.

Plots.

Basics of modelling and simulations.

209

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 9

Basic of Matlab- Matlab window, Input-Output, File Types, Platform dependence – Matrices and Vectors: Input,

Indexing, Matrix Manipulation, creating vectors- Matrix and Array Operations: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical,

Elementary math function, Matric function, character string.

UNIT II PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB (SCRIPTS AND FUNCTIONS) 9

Script Files- Function Files: Executing a function, More on functions Language, Sub-functions, Compiled

function (P code) – Language Specific Features: variables, Loops, branches, control-flow, Interactive input,

Recursion, Input/output - Advanced Data Objects: Multidimensional matrices, Structures, Cells– programming

for simple problem like conversion of temperature.

UNIT III GRAPHICS-PLOTTING 9

Basic2-D Plots: Style options, Labels, title, legend, and other text objects, Axis control, zoom-in, and zoom-out,

Modifying plots with Plot Editor, Overlay plots-3-D Plots: View, Rotate view, Mesh and surface plots, Vector field

and volumetric plots, Interpolated surface plots - Saving and Printing Graphs.

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9

Computer implementation - development of codes- Linear Algebra: Solving a linear system, Gaussian

elimination, Finding eigenvalues & eigenvectors - Curve Fitting and Interpolation: Polynomial curve fitting, Least

squares curve fitting - Interpolation - Numerical Integration (Quadrature): Double integration - Ordinary

Differential Equations (ODE): first-order linear ODE, second-order nonlinear ODE.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO SIMULINK AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Simulink and its Relation to MATLAB- library: sink, source, maths operation, logic & bit operations, discrete -

Modeling the Solution of Three Equations with Three Unknowns - Modeling a Fourth−Order Differential Equation

- Modeling an Electric Circuit - Applications: Moving Ladder, Conical Water Reservoir, Heat Flow, Cantilever

Beam Deflection, Feedback Control Systems.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rudra Pratap "Getting Started with MATLAB", Oxford University Press, 2002.

2. Steven T.Karris, "Introduction to Simulink® with Engineering Applications", Orchard Publications, 2nd

Edition, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Moore Holly, "Matlab for Engineers" Prentice Hall, 2009.

2. William J. Palm, "Introduction to MATLAB for Engineers”, 3rd Edition, 2010.

3. Amos Gilat, "MATLAB: An Introduction with Applications", 3rd edition, 2008.

4. Ferreira Ajm, "Matlab Codes for Finite Element Analysis - Solids and Structures", Springer, 2014.

15MEA18

MICRO AND NANO FABRICATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Able to define the concepts involved in IC chip manufacturing.

Gain knowledge on various Nano deposition technologies.

To learn the etching technologies used in semiconductor industry.

Emphasize on the importance of doping and surface modification.

To define the concept of self-assembled monolayers for Nano device fabrication.

210

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Gain knowledge on the wafer preparation techniques in IC industry.

Able to fabricate thin films for the fabrication of micro and nanodevices.

Able to apply the etching techniques in any prepared substrates for nanofabrication.

Learn the wafer technology applications and surface modification techniques.

Can design the self-assembled monolayers for nanofabrication.


Knowledge in electronics, physics, chemistry, materials science with mathematical background.

UNIT I CRYSTAL GROWTH, WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY 9

Basic steps in IC fabrication - Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation – Defects in the lattice –

Czochralski crystal growing – Silicon shaping – Processing consideration – Vapour phase epitaxy – Liquid phase

epitaxy - selective epitaxy - Molecular beam epitaxy - Epitaxial Evaluation.

UNIT II DEPOSITION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Deposition processes- Thermal, Plasma and Arc physical vapour deposition, Chemical vapour deposition

process- Atomic layer deposition process-Liquid phase deposition by spin coating, Spray coating, Dip coating,

Sol-gel Technology, Electrochemical and Chemical reaction deposition.

UNIT III ETCHING TECHNOLOGIES 9

Etching Technology basics, Wet chemical etching – process, etching of single crystal silicon, etching of

insulators, semiconductors and conductors – Dry etching – physical etching, Chemical dry etching, Physical-

Chemical process, Chemical etching – powder blasting, gas cluster ion beam etching (GCIB) technology.

UNIT IV DOPING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION 9

Importance of doping and surface modification-Introduction into doping-Doping by diffusion-Doping by

implantation-Doping applications-MEMS applications, Wafer Technology applications- Thermal oxidation of

silicon- oxidation mechanisms, oxidation equipments and process.

UNIT V NANOFABRICATION BY SELF-ASSEMBLY 9

Self-Assembly process- Introduction to self-assembly, Chemical, Physical and Colloidal Self-Assembly, Static

and dynamic Self-assembly, Directed self-assembly-Basics, Mechanisms-Surface topography and surface

wetting, Role of defects in self-assembly. Self-assembled monolayers (SAMs).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, JurgLeuthold, “Micro and Nano Fabrication: Tools and Processes”,

Springer, 2015.

2. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mark J. Jackson, “Microfabrication and Nano manufacturing”, Taylor andFrancis Group, 2006.

2. Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”,InTech Publisher, 2011.

3. Milton Ohring, “Materials Science of Thin Films: Deposition and Structure”, Academic Press, 2002.

4. Rointan F. Bunshah, “Handbook of Deposition Technologies for Films andcoatings, science, Technology

and applications”, Noyes Publications, 1994.

211

15MEA19

FUNDAMENTALS OF NATURE INSPIRED ALGORITHMS

L

T

P

C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The intention of this course is to

Give an overview of the fundamentals of a special category of algorithms developed from the

inspiration of natural things.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the fundamentals of heuristic search algorithms.

Apply the concept of the natural behavior of agents in the optimization.

Understand different types of search algorithms.

Apply the behavior of ant in solving large sized computational problems.

Understand the basics of population base algorithms.


Calculus, Functions.

Linear and Non-linear Function.

Discrete and Continuous variables.

Maximum and minimum values of continuous function.

Discrete function.

UNIT I HEURISTIC SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9

Introduction to Heuristic Algorithm – Robustness of traditional optimization and search methods – Goal of

optimization – Combinatorial optimization – Problem complexity – Classification of Search algorithms – Nature

inspired algorithms – Single point search algorithms – Population based algorithms.

UNIT II SINGLE POINT SEARCH ALGORITHMS 9

Memory less single point search – Local search – Neighborhood search – Variable neighborhood search –

Iterated local search Simulated Annealing – Memory based search algorithms –Tabu search – Hybrid

algorithms.

UNIT III EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9

Search algorithm – Genetic algorithm – Coding methods –Phenotype and phenotype representation of

solution and mathematical foundation of Genetic Algorithm. Mapping of objective function – Fitness function –

Computer implementation of Genetic Algorithm– Data structure – Roulette Wheel selection – Genetic

operators – Cross over operators – various types – Mutation operators.

UNIT IV ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9

Advanced Population based search algorithms – Introduction to Ant Colony Optimization – Ant System –

Pheromone trail – Desirability factor – Variants in ant colony optimization – Simple applications.

UNIT V PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION 9

Swarm intelligence – Particles and swarm – Objective and fitness function – Velocity of particle – Cognition

component – Social component – gbest and pbest concept – Evolution of PSO – Simple applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. David Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithm in search, Optimization and Machine learning", Addison–

Weseley Publishers.

2. David Corne, et al. "New Ideas in Optimization" McGraw Hill Publishers. 1999.

212

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. James Kennedy, Russell C. Eberhart, with Yuhui Shi, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001.

2. AndriesEngelbrecht, “Computational Intelligence – an Introduction”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2007.

3. Eric Bonabeau, Marco Dorigo, and Guy Theraulaz, “Swarm Intelligence: FromNatural to Artificial

Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1999.

15MEA20 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Design, construction and operation of energy efficient buildings.

Utilization of energy efficient technologies.

Energy efficient building codes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course students will be able to understand and apply

The concepts and techniques of energy efficient buildings.

The concepts and techniques of different energy efficient technologies and energy conservation

measures in different equipment's used in buildings.

The concepts and techniques of indoor environmental quality.

The energy transfer in different buildings.

The policies, rules and regulation for energy efficient building thereby facilitating towards sustainable

development.


Basic knowledge in Refrigeration and Air-conditioning.

Sun, Earth movement.

Climate change.


The sun-earth relationship and the energy balance on the earth's surface, climate, wind, solar radiation, and

solar temperature, sun shading and solar radiation on surfaces, energy impact on the shape and orientation of

buildings, thermal properties of building materials. Technology Roadmap on Energy-efficient Buildings.

UNIT II ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES 9

Passive cooling and day lighting, active solar and photovoltaic, building energy analysis methods, building

energy efficiency standards, different lighting technologies. Refrigeration and air conditioning systems, energy

conservation in pumps, fans and blowers, refrigerating machines, heat rejection equipment, energy efficient

motors, and insulation. Energy Efficiency Trends in Residential and Commercial Buildings, Energy Efficiency

in traditional buildings.

UNIT III INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 9

Psychrometry, comfort conditions, thermal comfort, ventilation and air quality, air conditioning requirement,

visual perception, auditory requirement, illumination requirement, choice of lighting, lighting standards, control

of lighting, lighting economics and aesthetics, energy saving, impacts of lighting efficiency, electronic ballast.

Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation – Ventilation Design – Energy conservation in

ventilating systems.

213

UNIT IV ENERGY TRANSFER IN BUILDINGS 9

Concepts of energy efficient buildings and energy efficient HVAC systems. Calculation of heating and cooling

loads of the building. Heating and Cooling Equipment. Building’s energy balance accounting for solar energy

gain – Heat losses - Internal heat sources. Study of climate and its influence in building design for energy

requirement. Low energy and zero energy buildings.

UNIT V GREEN BUILDINGS 9

Ecological sustainable design, working group sustainable construction methods & techniques. Barriers to

green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, embodied energy, operating energy, façade

systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, LEED and IGBC

codes. Energy efficiency requirements in building codes, energy efficiency policies for new buildings.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. John Littler and Randall Thomas, “Design with Energy: The Conservation and Use of Energy in

Buildings”, Cambridge University Press, 1984.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Edward G Pita, “An Energy Approach- Air-conditioning Principles and Systems”, Pearson Education,

2003.

2. Colin Porteous, “The New Eco-Architecture”, Spon Press, 2002.

3. Lever More G J, “Building Energy Management Systems”, E and F.N Spon, London, 2000.

4. Means R.S., “Green building: project planning and cost estimating”, Kingston, 2006.

5. Kibert C.J. “Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design”, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2007.

6. Eicker U., “Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings”, Wiley, 2009.

7. Attmann O., “Green Architecture”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.bee-india.nic.in

2. http://www.iea.org

3. http://www.unep.org

15MEA21 WATER TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the quality of water parameters.

To know about the purification of water by filtration process.

To impart the knowledge about usage of membranes in water purification system.

To know about biological membrane system used in water purification.

To study about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understanding the quality of water parameters will be achieved.

Acquiring knowledge about different kinds of filtration techniques.

Gathering idea about usage of membranes in water purification system.

Understanding the effect of biological membrane system used in water purification.

Studying about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.

214


Knowledge in physics, chemistry, materials science, environmental engineering, and safety engineering.

UNIT I WATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS 9

Physical, Chemical and Biological Characteristics of Water. Standard methods of determination of important

physical and chemical parameters of water qualities- PH, turbidity, electrical conductivity, total Solids, alkalinity,

hardness, Dissolved oxygen, BOD and COD - Units of measurements and expression of results- Estimation of

hardness (EDTA method only)- Bacteriological Indicators.

UNIT II WATER PURIFICATION BY FILTRATION 9

Solid Liquid separation systems-Filtration systems- Theory of Membrane separation – mass Transport

Characteristics Cross Flow filtration-Membrane Filtration- Types and choice of membranes, porous, non-porous,

symmetric and asymmetric – Plate and Frame, spiral wound and hollow fibre membranes – Liquid Membranes.

UNIT III MEMBRANE PROCESSES AND SYSTEMS 9

Microfiltration – Ultrafiltration- Nano Filtration – Reverse Osmosis – Electro dialysis- Evaporation -Membrane

manufactures – Membrane Module/Element designs – Membrane System components – Design of Membrane

systems - pump types and Pump selection – Plant operations – Economics of Membrane systems

UNIT IV MEMBRANE BIOREACTORS 9

Introduction and Historical Perspective of MBRs, Bio-treatment Fundamentals, Biomass Separation MBR

Principles, Fouling and Fouling Control, MBR Design Principles, Design Assignment, Alternative MBR

Configurations, Commercial Technologies, Case Studies.

UNIT V MEMBRANE FOULING 9

Membrane Fouling – Pretreatment methods and strategies – monitoring of Pretreatment – Langlier Index, Silt

Density Index, Chemical cleaning, Biofoulant control – Types of foulants and scalants – Natural organic matter

fouling - Impact of membrane material on fouling - Reversible and irreversible fouling- Prevention of fouling and

Fouling control.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Klaus-Viktor Peinemann, Suzana Pereira Nunes, " Membranes for Water Treatment”, Volume 4, Wiley

publishers, 2010.

2. Peter Hillis “Membrane Technology in Water and Wastewater Treatment”, RSC (Special Publications)

1st Edition, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Angelo Basile, Alfredo Cassano, NavinRastogi, “Advances in membrane technologies for water

treatment: Materials, process and applications”, Woodhead Publishing, 2015.

2. Water Environment Federation (WEF), “Membrane Systems for Wastewater Treatment”, McGraw-Hill,

USA, 2005.

3. Symon Judd, “The MBR Book – Principles and application of Membrane Bioreactors in water and

wastewater treatment”,Elsevier, 2006.

4. Jorgen Wagner,” Membrane Filtration handbook, Practical Tips and Hints”, Osmonics Inc.,2nd Edition,

Revision2, 2001.

215

5. Mulder M, “Basic Principle of Membrane Technology”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1996.

6. Noble, R.D. and Stern, S.A., “Membrane Separations Technology: Principles and Applications”,

Elsevier, 1995.

Offered by IT Department

15ITA01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.

To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.

To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms

Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping

Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations

Work with color and illumination models

Apply different methods for Modeling


C Programming


Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing

Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle Algorithm-

Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.

UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9

Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- Straightlines-

Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of

straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary point-

Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping

UNIT III THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9

Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis in

space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-

perspective-3D clipping

UNIT IV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9

Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-

Reflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading

Methods

UNIT V MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-

Grammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by

Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, ”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008

216

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison Wesley,2004

2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008

3. F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-2003/

2. http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/

3. http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html

4. http://nptel.ac.in/

15ITA02 RICH INTERNET APPLICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To create websites combining HTML/CSS

To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc

To develop a design with CSS

To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles

To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design a website in HTML

Apply concepts of element header in HTML

Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..

Create styles for the HTML document

Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS


NIL

UNIT I INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9

HTML & XHTML – markup instructions & Language – Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units – Tag

Attributes- Text and Comments – Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure – Head & Body – Styles

Definition – Block Elements – Inline Elements – Organisational Elements – Link – Images - Comments

UNIT II ELEMENT HEADER 9

Head – Document Title – Script & Style sections – Document background color and image – Text Structuring –

Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered – Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders

and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with Tables

UNIT III FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA 9

Framesets – frame – links to frames – nested framesets – Forms – GET and POST – Form attributes – Textbox –

checkbox – radiobutton – listbox – Buttons – Hidden fields – Images - Insert a Image – sizing – image maps –

multimedia – animated images & videos – embedding media

UNIT IV PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9

Styles and HTML – defining styles – cascading styles – style definitions – understanding selectors –

understanding style inheritance – pseudo-class – pseudo-elements – CSS value and units – inheritance and

cascade

217

UNIT V FORMATTING WITH CSS 9

CSS Inheritance and cascade – Font properties – Text Formatting – CSS lists – Padding, margin and borders –

CSS layouts – CSS positioning – Pseudo-elements and generated content – Dynamic HTML with CSS

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Steven M.Schafer, “ HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October 24, 2006

2. Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000

3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006

4. Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010

5. Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.codecademy.com

2. http://www.w3schools.com/html/

3. http://www.w3schools.com/css/

4. https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css

5. http://tutorialehtml.com/en/

6. http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm

7. http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/

15ITA03 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.

Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking methods, using class libraries, etc

Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems

Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write basic programs using fundamental structures.

Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.

Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.

Create Simple applications with GUI

Develop applications using applet and graphics.

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

Object Oriented Programming using C++

UNIT I JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9

Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants -

Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do

http://www.amazon.com/Chuck-Musciano/e/B000APEZS8/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.com/Bill-Kennedy/e/B000APEZTC/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_2

http://www.amazon.in/Thomas-A.-Powell/e/B000AP7P76/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Thomas+Powell&search-alias=stripbooks

218

while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values – Overloading

methods.

UNIT II OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9

Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static

Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-Implementing

Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.

UNIT III EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9

Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try

-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked

Exceptions

UNIT IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9

Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse events

– Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout

Management

UNIT V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9

Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and applet

tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,

and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOK

1. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7th

Edition, Pearson Education,2013

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.

2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.

3. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html

2. http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html

3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -

4. http://horstmann.com/corejava

5. www.deitel.com

6. http://www.kodejava.org/

7. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java

http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html

http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html

http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/

http://horstmann.com/corejava

http://www.deitel.com/

http://www.kodejava.org/

219

15ITA04 PERL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To teach how to do programs in Perl

To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs

To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl

To read and write subroutines and data files

To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures

Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing

Implement Perl Input Output programming

Apply and match regular expressions using Perl

Validate data using regular expressions

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

C Programming

UNIT I SCALAR DATA 9

Perl programming introduction– Simple Perl program – Scalar data: Numbers – Strings – Variables – Operators–

Output with print – Getting user input – - The undefined value – Defined functions control structure - if – elseif - while

– unless – until – for control – loop control – conditional operator – logical operator

UNIT II LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES 9

Array elements – indices – List literals – Assignment – Interpolating arrays into strings – For each control structure –

Scalar and list context – Hash – Hash Element Access – Hash Assignment – Hash Functions – Use of Hash - %Env

Hash

UNIT III SUB ROUTINES AND IO 9

Sub routines definition– invoking sub routines – return variables – arguments – private variables – variable length

parameter list – lexical variables – non-scalar return values – persistent private variables – Standard input output –

formatted output – opening and using file handle

UNIT IV REGULAR EXPRESSION 9

Regular expression definition – using simple patterns – character classes – matching with regular expression –

anchors – match variables - precedence

UNIT V PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION 9

Substitution – split operator – join operator - list context – powerful regular expression – Perl Modules – finding

modules – installing modules – using modules – strings and sorting

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.

2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, “Perl How to Program”, Prentice Hall, First edition, 2001.

220

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/

2. https://www.perl.org

3. http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/

15ITA05 FUZZY SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making

To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making

To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations

To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments

Identify the suitable FIS for decision making

Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making

Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making

Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking


NIL


Introduction – The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology – Optimization –

Outranking – Evaluation – Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory – Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments

UNIT II DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9

Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems – Linguistic Variables – Fuzzy logic – Approximate Reasoning – An

Interactive Decision Support System – Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems – Expert Systems and Fuzzy

Sets

UNIT III MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9

Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical

Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming

UNIT IV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9

Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and

Membership functions in Decision Models

UNIT V DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9

Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus – Multiobjective

Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987

221

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012

2. S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007.

3. S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2003

WEB REFERENCES:

1. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt

2. www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf

3. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt

15ITA06 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL

To study the geometric objects and transformations

To Understand the various lighting and shading effects

To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations

Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL

Implement Lighting and shading effects

Apply various Modeling Techniques

Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

C Programming

UNIT I GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives

and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding

Interaction-Menus

UNIT II GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9

Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a colored

cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-

Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternion-classical and

computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal

UNIT III LIGHTING AND SHADING 9

Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying

Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to

fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-

Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal

222

UNIT IV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9

Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objects-Scene

Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-

Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise

UNIT V CURVES AND SURFACES 9

Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite

curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-

Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Edward Angel ,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2011

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2014

2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe ,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan Kauffmann,2005

3. Clayton Walnum,” 3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://learnopengl.com/

2. http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/

3. http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html

4. http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/

5. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf

15ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce web development with PHP

To work with various operations in PHP

To model the design in a web environment

To develop a webpage with database

To test and work with a PHP application

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Create simple basic PHP programs

Create programs using functions and strings

Explore the usage of arrays and objects

Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing

Implement database connectivity with PHP

223

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

NIL

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9

PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Data types – Variables –

Expression & Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages

UNIT II FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9

Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable functions –

Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping – comparing strings –

manipulating and searching strings -

UNIT III ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9

Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional

arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –

Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class – Introspection

UNIT IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9

HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –

Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling –

Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access

UNIT V DATABASE ACCESS & APPLICATION 9

PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file

level manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –

performance tuning

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic

Web Pages, O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008

2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private Limited ,2008

3. Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://php.net/

2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/

3. http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html

4. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php

5. http://www.w3schools.com/php/

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Steven+Holzner&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Timothy+Boronczyk&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Martin+E.+Psinas&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.com/Matt-Doyle/e/B0028OLTMY/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

224

15ITA08 ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To build your own android application for you mobile devices

To understand how android application works.

To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications

Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Use Android SDK for simple applications

Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.

Create Android application for data processing and management

Create location based services using android

Test the Android application

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

Java Programming

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID 9

Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android Application

Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming paradigms and Application

Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services

UNIT II USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9

User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,

Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid View, Table

View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications : Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles and Themes,

Creating Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets – Working with tablets:

Developing for the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects with drag and drop, Optimizing

applications for high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI. Resources, Assets, Localization:

Resources and Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources and assets, Resource-Switching in

Android. Localization, Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications, Publishing Localized Applications

UNIT III DATA STORAGE 9

Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting. Data

Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite Databases

UNIT IV NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9

Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors - how

sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS, Working with

Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity, Location based Services.

Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a Location Provider, Finding Your

Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.

UNIT V TESTING 9

Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity testing,

Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.

TOTAL: 45 Periods

225

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012

2. W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, “Android in Action”, Third Edition, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Wei-Meng Lee, “Android Application Development Cookbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2013.

2. Grant Allen, “Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. W1. https://developer.android.com

2. W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps

3. W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course

15ITA09 PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.

Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining classes, invoking methods, using class libraries, etc

Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.

Create programs using various collection data types.

Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.

Implement user defined python functions.

Design classes and use them

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

NIL


Python object types – Numeric Type Basics – Numeric Literals –Built in Numeric Tools – Python Expression operators –

Numbers in action – Other numeric types – String Literals – Strings in action – String methods – String formatting

expressions – String formatting method calls – General type categories

UNIT II LISTS AND DICTIONARIES 9

Lists in action – Basic list operations – List Iteration and comprehensions – Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes – Changing

list in place – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action – Basic dictionary operations – Changing Dictionaries In place –

Dictionary methods – A language table – Dictionary usage notes – Other ways to make dictionary – Tuples – Files –

Python Type Hierarchies

UNIT III STATEMENT AND SYNTAX 9

Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs – Assignment statements – Expression statements – Print operations –

if statements – Python syntax rules – while loops – for loops – Loop coding techniques – Iterators – List comprehension -

https://developer.android.com/

http://www.androidcentral.com/apps

https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course

226

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9

Coding functions- Scope basics – scope rules – global statement – Scopes and nested functions – Nonlocal statement –

Argument Passing Basics – Special Argument Matching modes – function design concepts- Recursive functions –

function objects – Anonymous functions – mapping functions

UNIT V CLASSES AND OOP 9

Class coding basics – Class Statement – Methods – Inheritance – Attribute tree construction – specializing Inherited

methods – Class Interface Techniques – Abstract super classes -Namespaces –simple names – Attribute names –

Namespace dictionaries – Operator overloading – Designing with classes

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners” O,Reilly, 2010

2. David Beazley , Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013

3. CHUN, WESLEY J ”Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012

4. GUTTAG, JOHN V ”Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/

2. http://www.learnpython.org/

3. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python

4. http://www.pyschools.com/

5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1

6. http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php

15ITA10 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the logic of MCDM Methods

To learn how to do pairwise comparison

To learn to do normalization of attributes

To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative

http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/

http://www.learnpython.org/

http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python

http://www.pyschools.com/

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1

227

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore various MCDM methods for decision making

Apply quantification methods for decision making problems

Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance

Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making

Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

NIL


Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – WSM – WPM – AHP –

Revised AHP – TOPSIS

UNIT II QUANTIFICATION 9

Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different scales –

Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results

UNIT III EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9

Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking

abnormalities

UNIT IV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9

Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP method –

Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method

UNIT V FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9

Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments - Analysis

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Springer 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and Applications” , Wiley 2010

2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987

3. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt

2. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt

3. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt

228

Offered by Bio-Tech Department

15BTA01 BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.

Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.

Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon the completion of the course students will be able to

Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning

of the cell.

Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.

Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and

regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.


Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.

UNIT I CELL STRUCTURE 9

Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and

function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and

functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.

UNIT II CELLULAR ORGANELLES 9

Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosome-

Lampbrush, polytene - Microscopy – light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field

microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.

UNIT III GENETIC MATERIAL 9

Identification of DNA as genetic material – Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA

replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA

replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.

UNIT IV GENE EXPRESSION 9

Transcription – RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription -

Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.

UNIT V THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS 9

Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis -

the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an

overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

229

TEXTBOOKS:

1. De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., “Cell and Molecular Biology”. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY, 8th

Edition, 2010.

2. Freifelder, D. “Molecular Biology”. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Benjamin L., “Gene VII” Oxford University Press: 2000.

2. Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., “Molecular biology of the Gene”, The

Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.

3. Snyder L & Wendy W., “Molecular Genetics of Bacteria”, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.

15BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.

Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.

Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the diversity of microbes.

Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.

Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.


Basic understanding of Biological sciences

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9

History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and

technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).

UNIT II STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9

Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General

morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram

negative cells - General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and

episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.

UNIT III BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9

Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria

Media, Sterilization – Physical and chemical sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application -

culturing techniques.

230

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9

Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) – Biodegradation of xenobiotics

(pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &

tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD – pollution indicating microbes – Biofertilizers.

UNIT V MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9

Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship

between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease

cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics – Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi

and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.

2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology-Principles and Explorations”, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.

2. Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9th Edition,

2007.

15BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.

To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.

To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.

Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.

Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.


Basic understanding of Biological sciences.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9

Water and Life – pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in

biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.

UNIT II CARBOHYDRATES 9

Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and

231

ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms – mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological

importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis -

TCA cycle.

UNIT III PROTEINS 9

Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their

classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of

proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids – Inborn

errors of metabolism.

UNIT IV LIPIDS 9

Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of

saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,

chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological

significance of fats.

UNIT V NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acids-

Metabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.

2. Stryer L., “Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.

2. Wilson K., Walker J., “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge

University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.

15BTA04 BASIC IMMUNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.

To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.

To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.

To familiarize students with immune system disorders.

To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.

Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.

Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in

vaccine designing.

232

Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.

Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.


Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.

UNIT I ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9

History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells

and Natural killer cells.

UNIT II INNATE IMMUNITY 9

Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:

Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.

UNIT III THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9

Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies: Structure

of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how

they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:

history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.

UNIT IV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9

Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired

Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves

disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.

UNIT V TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9

Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney – Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection -

Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.

2. Roitt I., Brostoff M., “Immunology”, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.

3. Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.

4. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, W.B. Saunders Co.,

Pennsylvania, 7th

Edition, 2011.

5. William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.

2. Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised

Edition, 2009.

233

15BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these

agents in the environment.

Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the

human.

To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the

knowledge on the policies, legislations.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the relationship between environment and human health.

Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.

Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.


Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9

Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor

and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.

UNIT II IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9

Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber -

Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium

in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and

mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central

nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.

UNIT III IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9

Characteristics & sources – BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive

waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross

infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.

UNIT IV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9

Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear

power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures

and health effects: case studies.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9

Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state

Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,

functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management – Hazardous

Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

234

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rodricks J.V., “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,

Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.

2. Lippmann M., “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, New York: Van

Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Philp, R. B., “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995

2. Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.

3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert, Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett

Publishers, Canada, 2007.

15BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Hazardous wastes and its effects.

Disposal of biological wastes.

Safe handling and management of biological wastes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.

To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of

health care wastes.

To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.


Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9

Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and

environment.

UNIT II BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9

Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated

with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.

UNIT III LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH-

CARE WASTE

9

National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The

International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.

235

UNIT IV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9

Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method

healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care

personnel and waste workers.

UNIT V MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9

Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,

reuse and recycling.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.

2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,

2004.

3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide For The

Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project

Consultancy Services, 2013.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.

2. Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.

15BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.

Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the

DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,

To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at

nanoscale.

Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and

characterization of nanomaterials.

Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.



236

UNIT I NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9

Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of

Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons

from Nature on making nanodevices.

UNIT II NANOMATERIALS 9

Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,

Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,

Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition – Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.

UNIT III PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials -

Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.

UNIT IV PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9

Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of

biomolecular recognition events – Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers – Microbial production

of inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures – Topographic and Electrostatic

properties of DNA and proteins – Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles – DNA oligomers – Use of DNA

molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9

Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanotechnology in agriculture – Nanomedicine - Drug delivery -

DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life -

Hybrid materials – Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of

nanotechnology.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”,

Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.

2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”,

Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,

Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.

2. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1st

Edition, 2002.

237

15BTA08 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The basic architecture of human body.

Organization of human organ systems.

Physiological significance of the human organ system.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand basic human anatomy.

Know the functions of different organs and their significance.

Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.



UNIT I GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY 9

Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.

UNIT II BLOOD 9

Composition of blood – Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting

mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.

UNIT III NERVE PHYSIOLOGY 9

Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and

function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission -

Neurotransmitters, types and functions.

UNIT IV MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 9

Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of

muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its

properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.

UNIT V CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 9

Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system

and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Stuart I. F H., “Human Physiology” McGraw- Hill, 13th

Edition, 2012.

2. Guyton and Hall, “Text book of Medical Physiology”, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015

.

238

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,

Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.

2. Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., “Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.

Offered by MBA Department

15BAA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop an understanding of business related finance.

To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.

To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost savings

and growth strategies.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:

understand financial terms

interpret financial statements

make decision on budgeting and investment

communicate with financial experts

UNIT I Introduction to Finance 9

Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –

Significance

UNIT II Financial Planning and Decisions 9

Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of

Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital

UNIT III Funds Management 9

Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external

UNIT IV Financial Statements 9

Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis

UNIT V Overview of Indian Financial Markets 9

Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10th

ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.

239

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7th

ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6th

ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.

15BAA02 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.

To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.

To understanding the functions of a marketing department.

To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course students will be able to:

Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.

Choose and understand the needs of the customers.

Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model

Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.

Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix

UNIT I Understanding Marketing Management – an overview 9

Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and

Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target

markets and Positioning.

UNIT II The Marketing mix element – Product 9

Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New

product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development

UNIT III The Marketing mix element – Price 9

Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,

Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology

UNIT IV The Marketing mix element – Promotion 9

Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal

selling, Sponsorship, Publicity

UNIT V The Marketing mix element – Place: channels of distribution 9

Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,

Internet marketing.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor

& Francis Group, 2014.

240

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10th ed.), TMH, 1994.

2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14th

ed.), Pearson India, 2012.

15BAA03 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization

To know the various functional areas of HRM

To understand the recent developments in HR

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM

Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization

Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees

Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization

Students will be aware of present development in HR

UNIT I Introduction 9

Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,

Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager

UNIT II Procurement of Human Resources 9

Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand

and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process

Socialization / Induction – Importance and Types

UNIT III Development / Training 9

Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive

Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and

360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer

UNIT IV Compensation and Motivation 9

Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –

Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and

Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types

UNIT V Maintenance and Separation 9

The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)

Act, 1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends

in HRM - HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1st ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.

2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12th

ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7th ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

2. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10th

ed.), Wiley, 2010.

3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.

4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2nd

ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.

5. Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9th

ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

6. Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS…€¦ · MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING...

Documents

Transcript of MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS…€¦ · MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING...